2013 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M · 2013 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M In Brief ... Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual - 2013 - crc2 - 11/8/12 Black plate (2,1) 2013 Chevrolet

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual - 2013 - crc2 - 11/8/12

2013 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-51Universal Remote System . . . . 5-60

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-29Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-34Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-50

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75


2013 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-2Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-17Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andCORVETTE are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 22758824 B Second Printing ©2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature


Introduction v

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/ActiveHandling System

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Universal Remote System . . . 1-19Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21Performance Information (Z06,ZR1, manual transmissionGrand Sport Coupe, and 427Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-22Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Website Information . . . . . . . . . 1-23


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑6.

B. Head-Up Display Controls(If Equipped). See Head-UpDisplay (HUD) on page 5‑30.

C. Turn and Lane-Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

Cruise Control on page 9‑42.

Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.

Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

D. Manual Shift Paddles (IfEquipped). See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑25.

E. Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑25.

F. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.

G. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑4.

H. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.

I. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.

J. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

K. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

L. Fuel Door Release Button. SeeFilling the Tank on page 9‑47.

Hatch/Trunk Release Button.See “Hatch/Trunk Release”under Hatch on page 2‑10.

M. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑6.

N. Convertible Top Switch(If Equipped). See ConvertibleTop on page 2‑22.

O. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑18.

P. Bluetooth Controls (IfEquipped). See Bluetooth onpage 7‑17.

Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 (If Equipped).

Q. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

R. Horn on page 5‑4.

S. Telescopic Steering ColumnControl (If Equipped). SeeSteering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

T. Keyless Ignition. See IgnitionPositions on page 9‑18.

U. Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7(If Equipped).

V. Shift Lever (Automatic Shown).See Automatic Transmission onpage 9‑25 or ManualTransmission on page 9‑29.

W. Active Handling System onpage 9‑35.

X. Power Outlets on page 5‑6.

Y. Selective Ride Control onpage 9‑40 (If Equipped).

Z. Parking Brake on page 9‑33.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used to lockand unlock the doors from up to30 m (100 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press the button (A) to remove thekey. The key can be used to lockand unlock the glove box and toopen the hatch/trunk lid if power tothe vehicle is lost. See Hatch onpage 2‑10 for more information.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press again within five seconds tounlock both doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

} : Press and hold forapproximately one second to openthe hatch/trunk.

L : Press to sound the horn.Press any other button on the RKEtransmitter to stop it.

See Keys on page 2‑1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Door Locks

From the outside, press Q or K onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.


In Brief 1-5

A. Door Handle Sensor

B. Power Door Lock Switch

C. Door Latch Button

With the RKE transmitter withinrange, grip the door handlesensor (A). See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.

From the inside, use the power doorlock switch (B).

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

To open a door from the inside,push the door latch button (C).A tone will sound when the button ispushed.

See Power Door Locks on page 2‑8.

Loss of Vehicle ElectricalPower

If the vehicle has lost battery power,the driver door can be openedmanually.

Inside the Vehicle

Pull the door release handle.

Outside the Vehicle

Use the key to open the hatch/trunk.See Keys on page 2‑1.


1-6 In Brief

Then, pull the manual door releasehandle.

Trunk ReleaseThe vehicle must be in P (Park) withan automatic transmission andNeutral with a manual transmission.

For manual transmission vehicles,the parking brake must be set whenthe engine is running for the hatch/trunk release to operate. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑33.

To release the hatch/trunk:

. PressV.

. Press} on the keyless entrytransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System onpage 2‑2.

. Press the hatch/trunk releasetouch pad with the keyless entrytransmitter within range. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2‑2.


In Brief 1-7

. Use the vehicle key. See Keyson page 2‑1.

See Hatch on page 2‑10.

Windows

The power window switches arelocated on each door.

Pull up or press down on the front ofthe switch to raise or lower thewindow. See Power Windows onpage 2‑17.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)allows the power windows tooperate when the ignition is off. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑21.

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑2.


1-8 In Brief

Power Lumbar and SideBolsters

A. Lumbar Support Control

B. Side Bolster Support Control

To adjust the support, if equipped:. Move control (A) forward or

rearward to adjust lumbarsupport.

. Move control (B) up or down toadjust the side bolsters.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑3.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑3.

Heated Seats

If available, the buttons are on theinstrument panel. The ignition mustbe on for this feature to work.

L : Press to turn on the heatedseat at the high setting.

Press again to switch to the lowsetting.

9 : Press to turn the system off.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑7.


In Brief 1-9

Memory Features

If available, the controls on thedriver door are used to program andrecall memory settings for the driverseat, outside mirrors, and thetelescopic steering column.

See Memory Seats on page 3‑4.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑8.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑9.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑10.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System)(Z06 and ZR1 Models Only) onpage 3‑33 or Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) (Coupe and ConvertibleModels Only) on page 3‑33.

Passenger SensingSystemThe passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagunder certain conditions. No otherairbag is affected by the passengersensing system.


1-10 In Brief

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible in therearview mirror when the vehicle isstarted.

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑20 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑17.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

To adjust mirrors:

1. Press} or| to select a mirror.

2. Press the control pad to adjustthe mirror.

3. Return the switch to the centerto deselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑15.

If the vehicle has the memoryfeature, a preferred mirror positioncan be stored. See Memory Seatson page 3‑4.

To fold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn it to the original position.

Interior Mirror

An automatic dimming rearviewmirror will automatically reduceheadlamp glare coming fromvehicles that are travelingbehind you.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑16.


In Brief 1-11

Steering WheelAdjustment

The lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever toward you.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Telescopic Steering Column

For vehicles with this feature, thetelescopic steering column control ison the right side of the steeringcolumn.

To adjust the telescopic steeringcolumn:

1. Push the switch forward to movethe wheel away from you.

2. Pull the switch toward you tomove the wheel closer to you.

The telescopic steering columnposition can be stored with yourmemory settings. See MemorySeats on page 3‑4.

Interior LightingCourtesy Lamps

When any door or the hatch/trunk lidis opened, the interior lamps will goon, unless it is bright outside.

The courtesy lamps can also beturned on and off by pressing theinstrument panel brightness knob.

Reading Lamps

The inside rearview mirror includestwo reading lamps. The lamps go onwhen a door is opened. When thedoors are closed, press the lampbuttons to turn on each lamp.


1-12 In Brief

Interior Light Control

The knob for this feature is locatedon the left side of the instrumentpanel. Push the knob in to turn theinterior lights on. Turn and hold theknob clockwise to brighten the lightsor counterclockwise to dim them.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑6.. Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑6.

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamp control is locatedto the left of the steering wheel, onthe multifunction lever.

O : Turn the band with thissymbol on it to operate the exteriorlamps.

O : Turns off all lamps.

AUTO: Sets the exterior lamps toautomatic mode. AUTO mode turnsthe exterior lamps on and offdepending on how much light isavailable outside the vehicle.

; : Turns on the parking lampstogether with the sidemarker lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps, andinstrument panel lights.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps,sidemarker lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, and instrument panellights.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Turn and Lane-Change Signals

on page 6‑4.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column.

w : Use for fast wipes.

? : Use for slow wipes.

3 : Use to set a delay betweenwipes.

x : Use for a delayed wipingcycle. Turn the intermittent adjustband down for a longer delay or upfor a shorter delay.

9 : Use to turn off the windshieldwipers.


In Brief 1-13

8 : Use for a for a single wipingcycle. For more wipes, hold thelever down longer.

Windshield Washer: Press andhold the button at the end of thelever to spray washer fluid on thewindshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑4.

Climate ControlsWith this system, the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.

A. Driver Temperature Control

B. Display

C. Passenger Temperature Control

D. AUTO

E. Air Recirculation

F. Air Conditioning

G. Fan Control

H. Air Delivery Mode Control

I. Defrost

J. Rear Window Defogger

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.


1-14 In Brief

Transmission

Manual Paddle Shift(Automatic Transmission)

The Manual Paddle Shift systemcan be used in D (Drive) or S (SportMode). The system is activated bypushing the paddle, above thesteering wheel spokes, to manuallyup-shift to the next gear, or pullingon the paddle, behind the steeringwheel spokes to manuallydown-shift. The current gear will bedisplayed in the Driver Information

(DIC), or the Head-Up Display(HUD), if the vehicle has either ofthese features.

The Manual Paddle Shift systemcan be deactivated by moving theshift lever from S (Sport Mode) backto D (Drive), or by holding the up‐shift paddle for more thanone second. If the shift lever was inD (Drive) when the system wasactivated, the transmission willreturn to automatic shifting after10 seconds of cruising at a steadyspeed and no manual shifts,or when the vehicle comes toa stop.

The Manual Paddle Shift system willnot allow either an up-shift or adown-shift, if the vehicle speed istoo fast or too slow, nor will it allowa start from 4 (Fourth) orhigher gear.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑26.

One to Four Shift Light(Manual Transmission)

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, when this light comeson, you can only shift from 1 (First)to 4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to2 (Second).

For more information about shiftingfor the best fuel economy, seeManual Transmission on page 9‑29.


In Brief 1-15

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Top Knob: Press to turn thesystem on and off. Turn to increaseor decrease the volume.

BAND: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, and if equipped,XM1 and XM2.

O / e : Turn to select radiostations.

t SEEKu : Press to seekstations.

t SCANu : Press and hold toscan stations.

V : Press to change the informationthat shows on the display whilelistening to the radio.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment on page 7‑1 andOperation on page 7‑4.

Setting Preset Stations

Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,and six AM, and if equipped,six XM1, and six XM2) can beprogrammed.

To program presets:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1,FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO EQ to select theequalization.


1-16 In Brief

5. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered pushbuttons until theradio beeps once.

6. Repeat the steps for eachpushbutton.

See Operation on page 7‑4.

Setting the Clock

To set the clock:

1. Press and hold H until thecorrect hour displays.

2. Press and hold M until thecorrect minute displays.

See Clock on page 5‑6.

Satellite RadioSiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.siriusxm.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.

Portable Audio DevicesThe vehicle has an auxiliary inputjack located on the right side of thefaceplate. External devices such asiPod®, MP3 players, etc. can beconnected to the auxiliary input jackusing a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jackcable. This is not an audio output;do not plug a headphone set intothe auxiliary input jack. SeeAuxiliary Devices on page 7‑17.

Bluetooth®

For vehicles with a Bluetoothsystem, it allows users with aBluetooth-enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,see www.gm.com/bluetooth andBluetooth on page 7‑17.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with steering wheelcontrols, some audio controls canbe adjusted at the steering wheel.


In Brief 1-17

b /g : Press to turn on and off thevehicle speakers. Press and holdlonger than two seconds to interactwith the OnStar® or Bluetoothsystems.

i : Press to reject an incomingcall, or to end a call.

e + / e −: Press to Increase ordecrease volume.

w /x : Press to change radiostations or select tracks on a CD.

1 to 6: Press to play stations thatare programmed on the radio presetpushbuttons.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑3.

Cruise Control

The cruise controls are located atthe end of the multifunction lever.

9 : Turns the system off.

R : Turns the system on.

+ : Makes the vehicle accelerate orresume a previously set speed.

T : Press the button at the end ofthe lever to set the speed.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑42.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separatenavigation manual that includesinformation on the radio, audioplayers, and navigation system.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of points ofinterest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See the navigation manual for moreinformation.


1-18 In Brief

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays on the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems and enablesaccess to the personalization menu.

The DIC buttons are located on theinstrument panel to the right of theinstrument panel cluster.

. 4 : Press to display fuelinformation such as fuel economyand range.

2 : Press to display gaugeinformation like oil pressure andtemperature, coolant temperature,automatic transmission fluidtemperature (if equipped), batteryvoltage, and front/rear tirepressures.

TRIP: Press to display your totaland trip distance driven, the elapsedtime function, your average speed,and the engine oil life.

OPTION: Press to choose personaloptions that are available on yourvehicle, depending on the optionsyour vehicle is equipped with, suchas door locks, easy entry seats, andlanguage.

RESET: Press, along with the otherbuttons, to reset system functions,select personal options, and turn offor acknowledge messages onthe DIC.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.

Vehicle Personalization

Some vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the DICbuttons located to the right of theinstrument panel cluster. Thefeatures that can be programmedinclude:. Units. Memory Features. Lighting Features. Lock and Unlock Feedback. Door Lock and Unlock Settings. Language. Personalization Name

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑51.


In Brief 1-19

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlet can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The accessory power outlet islocated inside the center consolestorage compartment, on theforward left side.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.

Universal Remote System

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another person

available to assist you withprogramming the Universal Remotesystem.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑60.

Roof PanelOn vehicles with a removable roofpanel, there are three releaselatches. Two are located on the frontof the roof panel and the other islocated on the back of the roofpanel. See “Removing the RoofPanel” under Roof Panel onpage 2‑18.

Until you are sure you can removethe roof panel by yourself, havesomeone help you. Once removed,the roof panel should always bestored properly in the rear storagecompartment.

For more information:. See “Storing the Roof Panel”

under Roof Panel on page 2‑18.. See “Installing the Roof Panel”

under Roof Panel on page 2‑18.


1-20 In Brief

ConvertibleIf equipped, the convertible top canbe lowered and stowed under thetonneau cover behind the rear seat.For step-by-step instructions, seeConvertible Top on page 2‑22.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release the Active Handlingbutton located on the centerconsole. i illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑42.

. Press and release the ActiveHandling button again to turn ontraction control.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑34.

The vehicle has an Active HandlingSystem that helps maintaindirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. SeeActive Handling System onpage 9‑35.

The vehicle may have CompetitiveDriving Mode (except Z06 withmagnetic Selective Ride Control orZR1), Performance TractionManagement (Z06 with magneticSelective Ride Control or ZR1), andLaunch Control systems designed toallow increased performance whileaccelerating and cornering. SeeCompetitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑36.


In Brief 1-21

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that the

tire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑62.

Performance Information(Z06, ZR1, manualtransmission Grand SportCoupe, and 427Convertible)Checking Engine Oil

This vehicle has a high performancedry sump lubrication system. Thissystem operates differently than astandard engine lubrication system.See Engine Oil on page 10‑13.

You should check the oil level onlyafter the engine has beenthoroughly warmed up and then

shut off for at least five minutes.This ensures that the oil levelreading obtained will be accurate.

Jump Starting the Battery

The battery is in the rear of thevehicle. You do not need to accessthe battery for jump starting. Thereare remote positive (+) and negative(−) terminals under the hood for thispurpose. See Battery on page 10‑37and Jump Starting on page 10‑75.

Brake Noise

Under certain weather or operatingconditions, occasional brake noisemight be heard with the vehicle'sperformance braking system. Thisbrake system is designed forsuperior fade resistance andconsistent operation using highperformance brake pads. Brakenoise is normal and does not affectsystem performance.


1-22 In Brief

Car Wash Guidelines

Automatic car washes are notrecommended for this vehicle.Some car washes cause damage tothe vehicle, the wheels, and theconvertible top, if the vehicle is soequipped.

If you drive the vehicle through anautomatic car wash that does nothave enough clearance for theundercarriage and/or wide rear tiresand wheels, you could damage thevehicle. Verify with the manager ofthe car wash that the vehicle will fitbefore entering the car wash or usea touchless car wash. See “WashingYour Vehicle” under Exterior Careon page 10‑79.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Press the TRIP button so theOIL LIFE percentage isdisplayed.

2. Press RESET and hold fortwo seconds. OIL LIFEREMAINING 100% will appear.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑19.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Premium Fuel

This vehicle's engine was designedto use premium unleaded gasoline.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑45.


In Brief 1-23

BatteryThis vehicle has a maintenance-freebattery. See Battery on page 10‑37and Jump Starting on page 10‑75.

For Z06, ZR1, manual transmissionGrand Sport Coupe, and 427Convertible models, the battery islocated in the rear hatch/trunk area.Access to the battery is notnecessary to jump start the vehicle.There are positive (+) and negative(−) terminals in the enginecompartment.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0800

New Chevrolet owners areautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance Program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑10.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.

Website InformationAn online owner manual, ownervideos, and additional ownershipinformation is available athttp://www.chevrolet.com/owners/chevy-manuals/.


1-24 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-9Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

DoorsHatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-14

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-15

Interior MirrorsAutomatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

RoofRoof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle witha Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the RKE transmitterin the vehicle, and children orothers could be caught in the pathof a closing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with an RKEtransmitter.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key located inside the RKEtransmitter can be used to lock andunlock the glove box and to open

the hatch/trunk lid if power to thevehicle is lost. See Hatch onpage 2‑10 for more information.

Press the button (A) near the bottomof the RKE transmitter to removethe key. Never pull the key outwithout pressing the button.

This vehicle has a keyless accesssystem with pushbutton start. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9‑18 forinformation on starting the vehicle.

If it becomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.

If locked out of the vehicle, contactRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑10.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.



. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to30 m (100 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions that canaffect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

The vehicle comes withtwo transmitters. Each transmitterwill have a number on top of it,“1” or “2.” These numberscorrespond to the driver of thevehicle. For example, the memory

seat position for driver 1 will berecalled when using the transmitterlabeled “1,” if enabled through theDIC. See Memory Seats onpage 3‑4 and VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑51 formore information.

Keyless Unlocking

Press the door handle sensor tounlock and open the doors if theRKE transmitter is within range. SeeDoor Locks on page 2‑7 and“Passive Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑51 for additional information.

Keyless Locking

The doors lock after severalseconds if all doors are closed andat least one RKE transmitter hasbeen removed from the interior ofthe vehicle. To customize whetherthe doors automatically lock whenexiting the vehicle, see “PassiveDoor Locking” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑51 foradditional information.

Keyless Trunk Opening

Press the hatch/trunk release buttonlocated on the rear of the hatch/trunk lid above the license plate toopen the trunk if the RKEtransmitter is within range. SeeHatch on page 2‑10 for additionalinformation.

This vehicle comes with twotransmitters.

Q (Lock): Press once to lock thedoors. When Q is pressed twice,the lights flash and the horn soundsto confirm locking.



K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. Press K twicewithin five seconds to unlock bothdoors. The interior lamps maycome on.

Pressing K also recalls the memorysettings. See Memory Seats onpage 3‑4 for more information.

} (Hatch/Trunk): Press andhold for about one second to unlockthe hatch/trunk. If the engine isrunning, the shift lever must be inP (Park) for an automatictransmission. For a manualtransmission, the shift lever must bein N (Neutral) with the parkingbrake set.

L (Panic): Press to sound thehorn. Press any other button on theRKE transmitter to stop it.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a

replacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Each vehicle can haveup to four transmittersprogrammed to it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.For vehicles sold in Canada, tworecognized transmitters are requiredto program a new transmitter.

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Both the recognized and newtransmitters must be with you.

3. Insert the vehicle key into thekey cylinder located above thelicense plate.

4. Open the hatch/trunk.

5. Turn the key five times withinfive seconds.

6. The DIC displays READY FORFOB #2, 3 or 4.

7. Place the new transmitter in theglove box transmitter pocket withthe buttons facing thepassenger side.

8. A beep sounds whenprogramming is complete. TheDIC displays READY FOR#3 or 4, or MAXIMUM NUMBEROF FOBS LEARNED.



9. To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Step 7.Press Acc. on the ignition switchif programming is complete.

10. Press K on each newlyprogrammed transmitter tocomplete the process.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter

This procedure requires three10-minute cycles to complete theprogramming process. UnitedStates owners are permitted toprogram a new transmitter to theirvehicle when a recognizedtransmitter is not available. TheCanadian immobilizer standardrequires that Canadian owners seetheir dealer for programming newtransmitters when two recognizedtransmitters are not available.

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Place the new transmitter in theglove box transmitter pocket withthe buttons facing thepassenger side.

3. Insert the vehicle key into thekey cylinder located above thelicense plate.

4. Open the hatch/trunk.

5. Turn the key five times withinfive seconds.

6. The DIC message displaysOFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARN.

7. Press Acc. on the ignitionswitch.

8. The DIC reads WAIT10 MINUTES and counts downto zero.

9. The DIC displaysOFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARNagain.

10. Press Acc. on the ignitionswitch.

11. Steps 8, 9, and 10 will berepeated two more times.

12. A beep sounds and the DICreads READY FOR FOB #1. Allpreviously known transmitterprogramming has been erased.



13. A beep sounds onceprogramming in complete. TheDIC displays READYFOR FOB #2.

To program additionaltransmitters, take transmitter 1out of the transmitter pocketand place transmitter 2 in thepocket. Up to four transmitterscan be programmed. The DICthen displays MAXIMUMNUMBER OF FOBS LEARNEDand exits theprogramming mode.

Press Acc. on the ignitionswitch to complete the process.

14. Press Acc. on the ignitionswitch if programming iscomplete.

15. Press K on each newlyprogrammed transmitter tocomplete the process.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak, theDIC may display NO FOBSDETECTED when trying to start thevehicle. To start the vehicle, placethe transmitter in the glove boxtransmitter pocket with the buttonsfacing the passenger side. Then,with the vehicle in P (Park) for anautomatic transmission, press thebrake pedal and /. If the vehiclehas a manual transmission, pressthe clutch and/. Replace thetransmitter battery as soon aspossible. Change the transmitterbattery if the DIC displays FOBBATTERY LOW.

Battery Replacement

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into theslot on the side of thetransmitter.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Reassemble the transmitter.



Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers — especiallychildren — can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a dooris locked it will not open. Youincrease the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash if the doors are notlocked. So, wear safety beltsproperly and lock the doorswhenever you drive.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock yourvehicle whenever youleave it.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

From the outside, press Q or K onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

A. Door Handle Sensor

B. Power Door Lock Switch

C. Door Latch Button

With the RKE transmitter withinrange, grip the door handlesensor (A). See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3. When the passenger dooris opened first, the driver door willalso unlock.

From the inside, use the power doorlock switch (B). See Power DoorLocks on page 2‑8.

To open a door from the inside,push the door latch button (C).A tone will sound when the button ispushed.

If the vehicle has lost battery power,the driver door can be openedmanually.



. From inside the vehicle, pull thedoor release handle.

. From outside the vehicle, usethe key to open the hatch/trunk.See Keys on page 2‑1.

Then, pull the manual doorrelease handle.

Power Door Locks

There is an indicator light on therear of the door near the window.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

When pressed, a beep sounds.If the door is closed, the indicatorlight flashes twice. If the door isopen, the indicator light flashes.



Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

When pressed, a beep sounds.If the door is closed when pressed,the indicator light comes on for afew seconds, then turns off. If thedoor is open when pressed, theindicator light stays on.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle is programmed so thatwhen the doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park) for automatictransmissions, or when vehiclespeed becomes faster than 13 km/h(8 mph) for manual transmissions,both doors will lock.

Use the power door unlock switch tounlock the door when the vehicle isnot in P (Park). When the door isclosed again, the doors will lockeither when your foot is removedfrom the brake or the vehicle speedbecomes faster than13 km/h (8 mph).

Automatic Door Unlock

The vehicle is programmed so thatwhen the shift lever is moved intoP (Park) for automatic transmissionvehicles or when the ignition isturned off or is in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) for manualtransmission vehicles, both doorswill unlock.

With the vehicle stopped and theengine running, door unlocking canbe programmed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Thisallows the driver to choose variousunlock settings. For programminginformation, see VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑51.

Lockout ProtectionThe vehicle can be programmed tosound the horn three times andunlock the driver door when bothdoors are closed and there is aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter inside the vehicle. Whenthe driver door is opened, areminder chime will sound. Thevehicle will remain locked only whenat least one transmitter has beenremoved from the vehicle and bothdoors are closed. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑51.



Doors

Hatch

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

Hatch/Trunk Release

The vehicle must be in P (Park) withan automatic transmission andNeutral with a manual transmission.

For manual transmission vehicles,the parking brake must be set whenthe engine is running for the hatch/trunk release to operate. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑33.

To release the hatch/trunk:

. PressV.

. Press} on the keyless entrytransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System onpage 2‑2.



. Press the hatch/trunk releasetouch pad with the keyless entrytransmitter within range.

. Use the vehicle key. See Keyson page 2‑1.

Hatch/Trunk Closing (Coupe)

Notice: Closing the hatch/trunkforcefully or from the sides cancause damage to the glass, thedefogger or the weather stripping.Be sure objects will fit in thehatch/trunk area before closingthe hatch/trunk. When closing thehatch/trunk, gently pull downfrom the center.

Notice: Do not store heavy orsharp objects in the rear storagecompartments located in thehatch/trunk area. The objectscould damage the underbody.

Pull down from the center of thehatch/trunk, closing it with light forceuntil the power latch featureactivates. The hatch/trunk will closethe rest of the way and latchautomatically.



Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle (Coupe)

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-darkemergency trunk release handlelocated on the rear wall of the trunkbelow the latch. This handle willglow following exposure to light. Pullthe release handle down to openthe trunk from the inside.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has a theft-deterrentalarm system.

The security light flashes if a door isopen and locked with the powerdoor lock switch.

If this light stays on while the engineis running, the vehicle needsservice.

Arming the System

To arm the system, press Q on theRKE transmitter, or open the doorand lock the door with the power



door lock switch. The security lightshould flash. Remove the RKEtransmitter from inside the vehicleand close the door. The securitylight stops flashing and stays on.After 30 seconds, the light shouldturn off.

The vehicle can be programmed toautomatically lock the doors andarm the theft-deterrent system whenyou exit the vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑51.

If a door or the hatch/trunk isopened without using the RKEtransmitter, the alarm goes off. Thehorn sounds for two minutes, thengoes off to save battery power. Thevehicle will not start without a RKEtransmitter present.

The theft-deterrent system does notarm if the driver door is locked withthe power door lock switch after thedoors are closed.

If the RKE transmitter is removedfrom the vehicle while a passengeris in it, have them lock the doors

after they are closed. The alarm willnot arm, so the passenger will notset it off.

Testing the Alarm

To test the system use the followingprocedure.

1. Make sure the trunk lid/hatch islatched.

2. Lower the window on thedriver door.

3. Manually arm the system.

4. Close the doors and wait30 seconds.

5. Reach through the open windowand manually pull the releaselever on the floor.

6. Press the K button on thetransmitter to turn off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound, checkto see if the horn works. The hornfuse may be blown. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10‑45.If the horn works, but the alarmdoes not go off, see your dealer.

Disarming the System

Press the K button on the RKEtransmitter or squeeze the doorhandle sensor while the transmitteris near the vehicle to unlock a door.Unlocking a door any other way setsoff the alarm. If the alarm sounds,press theK button on the RKEtransmitter to disarm it.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.



Immobilizer OperationThe vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the ignition is turned off.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition is turnedto OFF/ACCESSORY or START anda valid transmitter is found in thevehicle.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on if thereis a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

The system has one or more RKEtransmitters that are matched to animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle. Only a correctly matchedRKE transmitter starts the vehicle.The vehicle may not start if the RKEtransmitter is damaged.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light comes on, there maybe a problem with the immobilizersystem. Press the START buttonagain.

If the vehicle does not start and theRKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another RKEtransmitter. Or, place the transmitterin the transmitter pocket. See “NOFOBS DETECTED” under Key andLock Messages on page 5‑40 foradditional information. Check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑45. If theengine still does not start with theother transmitter, the vehicle needsservice. If the engine does start, thefirst transmitter may be faulty. Seeyour dealer or have a new RKEtransmitter programmed to thevehicle.

The immobilizer system can learnnew or replacement RKEtransmitters. Up to four RKEtransmitters can be programmed forthe vehicle. To program additionaltransmitters, see “Matchingtransmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press} or| to select a mirror.

2. Press the control pad to adjustthe mirror.

3. Return the switch to the centerto deselect the mirror.

If the vehicle has the memoryfeature, a preferred mirror positioncan be stored. See Memory Seatson page 3‑4.

Folding MirrorsTo fold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

Automatic DimmingMirrorIf the vehicle has this feature, thedriver side outside mirror adjusts forthe glare of headlamps behind you.This feature is controlled by the onand off setting on the insiderearview mirror.



Interior Mirrors

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorAdjust the rearview mirror to clearlyview the area behind the vehicle.

The mirror will automatically reduceglare of the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature and theindicator light come on when thevehicle is started. There may be anon and off setting on the mirror.

P (On/Off): Press to turn thisfeature on or off.

Vehicles with OnStar have threeadditional control buttons for theOnStar system. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Map Lamps

If the mirror has map lamps, theyare located at the bottom of themirror. To manually turn the lampson or off, press the button next toeach lamp.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.



Power Windows

{ WARNING

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. See Keys on page 2‑1.

Pull up or press down on the front ofthe switch to raise or lower thewindow.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)allows you to use the powerwindows when the ignition is off. Formore information, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑21.

Express-Down Window

Press the front of the switch to thesecond position to activate theexpress-down feature. To stop thewindow as it is lowering, press theswitch again.

Window Indexing

This feature automatically lowersthe window a small amount whenthe door is opened. When the dooris closed, the window will raise to itsfull up position. If either windowdoes not index properly, it could bedue to loss of power. Beforereturning to the dealer for service,perform the power window initializeprocedure.

Power Window Initialize

After a power reconnect such asbattery replacement, the windowindexing feature and the powerconvertible top (if equipped) will notfunction until the system isinitialized.

Once power is restored:

1. Close the doors.

2. Raise the window and hold theswitch up for three seconds afterthe window is closed.

3. Release the switch, then holdthe switch up again forthree seconds and release.

Sun VisorsPull the visor toward you, or move itto the side to help reduce glare.

To use the lighted mirror, lift thecover.



Roof

Roof PanelOn vehicles with a removable roofpanel, follow the procedures whenremoving or installing it.

Removing the Roof Panel

{ WARNING

Do not try to remove a roof panelwhile the vehicle is moving.Trying to remove the roof panelwhile the vehicle is moving couldcause an accident. The panelcould fall into the vehicle andcause you to lose control, or itcould fly off and strike anothervehicle. You or others could beinjured. Remove the roof panelonly when the vehicle is parked.

Until you are sure you can removethe panel alone, have someonehelp you.

Notice: If you drop or rest a roofpanel on its edges, the roof panel,paint, and/or weatherstrippingmay be damaged. Always placethe roof panel in the stowagereceivers after removing it fromthe vehicle.

1. Park on a level surface and setthe parking brake. Shift anautomatic transmission intoP (Park). Shift a manualtransmission into Neutral.

2. Make sure the ignition is off.

3. Lower both sun visors.

4. Open the rear hatch and removeany items that may interfere withproper storage of the roof panel.

5. Lower the windows.

There are two release latches onthe front of the roof panel andone rear release latch on theback of the roof panel.



6. To unlock the release latches onthe front of the roof panel, graspeach handle and pull it outward.

The driver side handle movestoward the driver door. Thepassenger side handle movestoward the passenger door.

7. To unlock the rear of the roofpanel's rear release latch, pressthe back of the releasehandle (B). Then press thebutton on the front of the releasehandle (A).

Pull down the latch lever.

8. Stand on one side of the vehicle,and if necessary, have someonestand on the other side.Together, carefully lift the frontedge of the roof panel up andforward.

9. When the roof panel is loosenedfrom the vehicle, one personshould grasp the roof panel asclose to the center as possibleand lift it away from the vehicle.

Storing the Roof Panel

{ WARNING

If a roof panel is not storedproperly, it could be thrown aboutthe vehicle in a crash or suddenmaneuver. People in the vehiclecould be injured. Whenever youstore a roof panel in the vehicle,always be sure that it is storedsecurely in the proper location.




1. Turn the roof panel so that thefront edge of the panel is facingthe storage area.

2. Insert the roof panel so that theoutside front edges line upbetween the receiver covers.Push forward on the roof paneluntil it stops.

3. Gently place the roof paneldown so that the back pins onthe roof panel drop into thereceivers in the back of thestorage area.

Press down firmly to seat the pins inthe receivers.

Installing the Roof Panel

{ WARNING

An improperly attached roof panelmay fall into or fly off the vehicle.You or others could be injured.After installing the roof panel,always check that it is firmlyattached by pushing up on theunderside of the panel. Checknow and then to be sure the roofpanel is firmly in place.




In most cases, it makes it easier iftwo people install the roof panel.

1. Park on a level surface and setthe parking brake. Shift anautomatic transmission intoP (Park). Shift a manualtransmission into Neutral.

2. Check that the front releaselatches and the rear releaselatch on the vehicle's roofopening are in their openedpositions before attempting toinstall the roof panel.

3. To remove the roof panel fromthe rear storage area of thevehicle, pull up on the rear edgeand remove it from thestorage area.

4. Carefully place the roof panelover the top of the vehicle.

5. Position the rear edge of the roofpanel to the weatherstrip on theback of the roof opening. Thenalign and fit the pins at the rearof the roof panel inside theopenings in the rear overhead

weatherstrip. Gently lower thefront edge of the roof panel tothe front of the roof opening.

6. Turn the front release handlesinward so that they latch to theclosed position.

7. Push up on the handle of therear roof release handle to latchits hook in the closed position.

8. Push and pull the roof panel upand down and side to side toensure the roof panel is securelyinstalled.

Removable Roof Panel

Notice: Using glass cleaner on apainted roof panel could damagethe panel. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not use glasscleaner on the painted roof panel.

When cleaning, removing, and/orstoring the roof panel:. Flush with water to remove dust

and dirt, then dry the panel.. Do not spray glass cleaner

directly on the transparent roofpanel. Use a soft, lint-free clothdampened with glass cleaner.

. Do not use abrasive cleaningmaterials on either type of panel.



Convertible TopAfter a power reconnect such asbattery replacement, the powerwindows need to be initialized forthe convertible top to work. See“Power Window Initialize” in PowerWindows on page 2‑17.

Manual Operation

For care and cleaning of theconvertible top, see “Cleaning theConvertible Top” in this section.High-pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.

If the vehicle has this feature, thefollowing procedures explain theproper operation of the manualconvertible top.

The parts of the manual convertibletop that are used when lowering andraising it are:

A. Front Edge of theConvertible Top

B. Rear Edge of theConvertible Top

C. Tonneau Cover

Notice: Leaving the convertibletop down and exposing theinterior of the vehicle to outdoorconditions may cause damage.Always close the convertible topif leaving the vehicle outdoors.

Notice: Lowering the convertibletop when there are objects in thestorage area could damage it orbreak the glass rear window.Always verify that no objects arein the storage area beforelowering the convertible top.

Notice: Lowering the convertibletop if it is damp, wet, or dirty cancause stains, mildew, anddamage to the inside of thevehicle. Dry off the convertibletop before lowering it.

Notice: If you lower theconvertible top on the vehicle incold weather (0°C (32°F) orlower), you may damageconvertible top components. Donot lower the top in cold weather.

Notice: If you raise or lower theconvertible top while the vehicleis in motion, you could damagethe top or the top mechanism.The repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Always put anautomatic transmission in



P (Park) or a manual transmissionin Neutral before raising orlowering the convertible top.

Lowering the ManualConvertible Top

1. Park on a level surface. Shift anautomatic transmission intoP (Park) and set the parkingbrake. Shift a manualtransmission into Neutral and setthe parking brake.


3. Make sure the trunk is closed.

4. Release the convertible top frontlatch, located above the insiderearview mirror, by pulling andturning it clockwise.

5. Lift upward on the front edge (A)of the convertible top to removeit from the windshield frame.Then lift upward on the rearedge (B) of the convertible topso it is vertical to the tonneaucover (C). The front edge (A) andrear edge (B) should bestraight up.

6. The convertible top front latchmust be turned and closed afterthe top has been pushed up.Failure to close the latch mayprevent the tonneau cover fromcompletely closing.

7. Tilt the driver seatback forwardand press the tonneau coverrelease button located on theunderside of the tonneaucover (C) behind the driver seat.After pressing the releasebutton, the driver and passengerdoor glass will retract to thefull-down position. Then raisethe tonneau cover (C).

If the tonneau cover does notrelease and three chimes areheard, check to make sure thetrunk lid is closed. Also, thetonneau cover will not release ifthe vehicle alarm is armed.



If battery power has not beenlost, continue to Step 9.

If battery power has been lost,the tonneau cover (C) can beopened using the manualrelease cable.

The tonneau cover manualrelease cable is locatedunderneath the carpeting behindthe passenger seat headrestraint, on the undersideforward edge of the tonneaucover. To access the cable, liftand pull back the carpeting.

Notice: If you lower theconvertible top into the storagecompartment and the rear edge ofthe top is not in the full-down

position, you could damage thetop. Always verify that the rearedge of the convertible top is inthe full-down position beforelowering the top into the storagecompartment.

8. Pull the cable to release thetonneau cover, then continuewith Step 9.

9. Push forward on the frontedge (A) of the convertible top toallow the rear edge (B) of theconvertible top to be moved toits full-down position.

10. Then move the convertible toprearward to its fully storedposition.

11. After the convertible top isstored, apply one even push onthe center of the front edge (A)of the convertible top to ensurethat the convertible top is fullyretracted.

12. Close the tonneau cover (B) bypressing down on it with aswift, firm motion.



Raising the ManualConvertible Top

1. Park on a level surface. Shift anautomatic transmission intoP (Park) and set the parkingbrake. Shift a manualtransmission into Neutral and setthe parking brake.

2. Lower both windows.


4. Tilt the driver seat forward andpress the tonneau cover releasebutton. After pressing therelease button, the driver andpassenger door glass will retractto the full-down position.If battery power has been lost,see Step 7 under “Lowering theManual Convertible Top” in thissection.

After pressing the releasebutton, the driver and passengerdoor glass should retract to thefull-down position, if they havenot already been lowered.

5. Lift the tonneau cover.

6. Pull the convertible top up byfirmly gripping the front edge (A)near the center and applying abrisk upward and forward motionto get the top in the full-upposition.



7. Lift the rear edge (B) of theconvertible top to its full-upposition by first raising the frontedge (A).

8. Close the tonneau cover (C) bypushing it down with a swift, firmmotion.

9. Lower the rear edge (B) of theconvertible top by first slightlypushing the front edge (A) of theconvertible top forward.

10. Push the front edge (A) of theconvertible top down from theoutside of the vehicle, or pullthe front edge (A) of the

convertible top down from thecenter pull-down handlelocated inside the vehicle.

11. Pull the convertible top frontlatch down and turn itcounterclockwise to lock theconvertible top.

Power Operation

For care and cleaning of theconvertible top see “Cleaning theConvertible Top” in this section.High-pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.

To operate the convertible top usethe following steps.

Notice: Leaving the convertibletop down and exposing theinterior of the vehicle to outdoorconditions may cause damage.Always close the convertible topif leaving the vehicle outdoors.

Notice: Lowering the convertibletop when there are objects in thestorage area could damage it orbreak the glass rear window.

Always verify that no objects arein the storage area beforelowering the convertible top.

Notice: Lowering the convertibletop if it is damp, wet, or dirty cancause stains, mildew, anddamage to the inside of thevehicle. Dry off the convertibletop before lowering it.

Notice: If you lower theconvertible top on the vehicle incold weather (0°C (32°F) orlower), you may damageconvertible top components. Donot lower the top in cold weather.

Notice: If you raise or lower theconvertible top while the vehicleis in motion, you could damagethe top or the top mechanism.The repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Always put anautomatic transmission inP (Park) or a manual transmissionin Neutral before raising orlowering the convertible top.



Lowering the PowerConvertible Top

1. Park on a level surface. Start theengine. Shift an automatictransmission into P (Park) andset the parking brake. Shift amanual transmission into Neutraland set the parking brake.

2. Make sure the trunk is closed,the rear trunk partition in the rearstorage area is in the fastenedupright position, and no objectsare forward of the divider. See“Rear Trunk Partition” in RearStorage on page 4‑1.

3. Release the convertible top frontlatch, located above the insiderearview mirror, by pulling and

turning it clockwise. Pushupward on the front edge. Thewindows will automatically lower.

4. Return the convertible top frontlatch to the closed position.

5. Push and holdª on theconvertible top switch.

The convertible top will lower intothe rear of the vehicle. A chime willsound when the convertible top haslowered completely. If the radio ison, the sound may be muted for abrief time due to a new audiosystem equalization being loaded.

If the convertible top is operatedmultiple times, the engine should berunning to prevent drain on thevehicle's battery. Under certainconditions, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) may display amessage regarding the convertibletop. See Convertible Top Messageson page 5‑36.

Raising the Power Convertible Top

Notice: If you raise or lower theconvertible top while the vehicleis in motion, you could damagethe top or the top mechanism.The repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Always put anautomatic transmission inP (Park) or a manual transmissionin Neutral before raising orlowering the convertible top.

1. Park on a level surface. Start theengine. Shift an automatictransmission into P (Park) andset the parking brake. Shift amanual transmission into Neutraland set the parking brake.



2. Make sure the trunk lid is closed,the rear trunk partition in the rearstorage area is in the fastenedupright position, and no objectsare forward of the divider. See“Rear Trunk Partition” in RearStorage on page 4‑1.

3. Push and hold« on theconvertible top switch. Theconvertible top will raise and thewindows will lower if they werein the raised position. A chimewill sound when the convertibletop is raised completely.

4. After the convertible top iscompletely raised, release theconvertible top switch.

5. Pull the convertible top frontlatch down and turn itcounterclockwise to lock theconvertible top.

If the radio is on, the sound may bemuted for a brief time due to a newaudio system equalization beingloaded.

If the vehicle has lost power, theconvertible top can still be raised byreleasing pressure on the hydraulicpump, located under the passengerside of the tonneau cover, using thefollowing steps. The carpet liner onthe passenger side must be pulledback to access the hydraulic pump.

Never attempt to open or close theconvertible top manually withoutreleasing pressure first.

Manual operation of the convertibletop cannot be attempted forfive minutes after the last time theconvertible top switch was pressed

if the convertible top was notopened completely and the tonneaucover latched or closed completelywith the front latch locked in placeat the time the convertible topswitch was released.

1. Open the tonneau cover bypulling the manual releasecable.

The tonneau cover manualrelease cable is located behindthe passenger seat headrestraint, on the undersideforward edge of the tonneaucover.



Be careful when opening thetonneau cover by hand. If thetonneau cover is opened quickly,damage can occur to the hingingmechanism, which can preventproper operation of theconvertible top.

2. Pull back the carpet liner on thepassenger side to access thehydraulic pump.

3. Locate the pressure release bolton the front side of thehydraulic pump.

4. Use the wrench, located in thecenter console, and turn thepressure release boltcounterclockwise one revolution,to relieve pressure to thehydraulic pump. This will allowthe manual raising of theconvertible top.

5. Then follow the steps underraising the manual convertibletop. See “Manual Operation” or“Power Operation” in thissection.

When power is restored to thevehicle, the hydraulic bolt must betightened, by turning it clockwise.The convertible top switch can thenbe used to lower or raise theconvertible top.

If the convertible top is operatedmultiple times, the engine should berunning to prevent drain on thevehicle's battery. Under certainconditions, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) may display a

message regarding the convertibletop. See Convertible Top Messageson page 5‑36.

If the battery has beendisconnected, the power windowsmust be initialized for the powerconvertible top to operate. SeePower Windows on page 2‑17.

Cleaning the Convertible Top

The convertible top should becleaned often. However,high-pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.

When hand washing the convertibletop, do it in partial shade. Use amild soap, lukewarm water, and asoft sponge. A chamois or cloth mayleave lint on the top, and a brushcan chafe the threads in the topfabric. Do not use detergents, harshcleaners, solvents, or bleachingagents.



Wet the entire vehicle and wash thetop evenly to avoid spots or rings.Let the soap remain on the fabric fora fewminutes. When the top isreally dirty, use a mild foam-typecleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entirevehicle, then let the top dry in directsunlight.

To protect the convertible top:. After washing the vehicle, make

sure the convertible top iscompletely dry before lowering it.

. Do not get any cleaner on thevehicle's painted finish; it couldleave streaks.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-2Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-13Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-13Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-16When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-25

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-25Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-31Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)(Coupe and ConvertibleModels Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)(Z06 and ZR1Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Securing Child Restraints . . . . 3-37


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front seats have headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a power seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.



Lumbar Adjustment

Power Lumbar and SideBolsters

A. Lumbar Support Control

B. Side Bolster Support Control

To adjust the support, if equipped:. Move control (A) forward or

rearward to adjust lumbarsupport.

. Move control (B) up or down toadjust the side bolsters.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.




{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Memory Seats

If available, the controls on thedriver door are used to program andrecall memory settings for the driverseat, outside mirrors, and thetelescopic steering column (ifequipped).

The numbers on the back of theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters correspond to thenumbers on the memory buttons.



Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, bothoutside mirrors, and thetelescopic steering column (ifequipped).

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall a memory position:. On vehicles with an automatic

transmission, press and release“1” or “2.”

If the vehicle is in P (Park), asingle beep sounds and thememory position is recalled aftera brief delay.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park),three beeps sound and thememory position is not recalled.

. On vehicles with a manualtransmission, when the vehicleis on, the parking brake must beset to recall a memory position.Press and release “1” or “2.”

A single beep sounds and thememory position is recalled aftera brief delay.

If the vehicle is on and theparking brake is not set,three beeps sound and thememory position is not recalled.

Memory Remote Recall (AutomaticTransmission)

This feature can recall the driverseat, outside mirrors, and telescopicsteering column (if equipped) tostored positions when entering thevehicle.

To activate, enter the vehicle andstart the engine. The driver seat,outside mirrors, and telescopicsteering column will move to thememory position associated with thetransmitter used to unlock thevehicle.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑51.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the power seat controls, powermirror or memory buttons, or thetelescopic steering column switch.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the memory item that isnot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby pressing the appropriate memorybutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature can move the seatrearward and the telescopic steeringcolumn (if equipped) out of the wayto allow extra room to exit thevehicle.



B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Pressto save and recall the easy exit seatposition.

To save into memory:

1. Recall the desired drivingposition by pressing “1.”

2. Adjust the seat and thetelescopic steering column to thedesired exit position.

3. Press and holdB untiltwo beeps sound.

4. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall, press and releaseB.The vehicle must be in P (Park) foran automatic transmission or theparking brake must be set for amanual transmission. A single beepsounds. The seat and telescopicsteering column will move to theposition previously stored for theidentified driver.

If this feature is programmed on inthe vehicle personalization menu,automatic recall occurs when one ofthe following conditions is met:. The vehicle is turned off, in

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) or accessorymode, and the driver door isopened.

. The vehicle is turned off, or inRAP, and the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter is pressed.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑51.

Seatback Latches

To fold a seatback forward, lift thelatch on top of the backside of theseat. The seatback locks whenfolded down.



{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return a seatback to the sittingposition, lift up on the latch, raisethe seatback, and push theseatback rearward. Push and pullon the seatback to make sure it islocked in place.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

If available, the buttons are on theinstrument panel.

The ignition must be on for thisfeature to work.

L (Heated Seat): Press to turn theheated seat on at the high setting.

Press again to switch to the lowsetting.

9 (Off): Press to turn the heatedseat off.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areas

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑16.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the



safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑26 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑28.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.



. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑20 for more information.



3. If the belt stops before it reachesthe buckle, tilt the latch plate andkeep pulling the safety belt untilit can be buckled.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑13.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.

They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, for vehicleswith side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a side crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash on page 3‑13.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.



Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt system

from doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑16.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑13.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.



See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑17.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear the safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑26 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑28.



There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severe

injuries mainly to the driver's or frontoutboard passenger's head andchest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.



Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

Depending on the model, thevehicle may have one or two seatposition sensors. The seat positionsensor(s) enable the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat (all models) and the frontoutboard passenger seat(all models). Seat position sensor(s)provide information that is used indetermining whether the airbagsshould inflate at a reduced or fulllevel.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags. See Airbag Systemon page 3‑14. Seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes, depending on the locationof the impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact airbags will inflate if thecrash severity is above the system'sdesigned threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑16.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.



Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑17 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbags inflate, theyquickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize theairbags inflated. Some componentsof the airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3‑16.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathing

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

problems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnthe interior lamps on, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnthe interior lamps off, and turn thehazard warning flashers off by usingthe controls for those features.



{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some new

parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording on page 13‑18.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag system.Improper service can mean thatthe airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. The

passenger airbag status indicatorwill light in the rearview mirror whenthe vehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol foron or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑17.



The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagunder certain conditions. No otherairbag is affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag should be allowed to inflateor not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weight andsize. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints not betransported in the vehicle, even ifthe airbags are off.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

inflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbags are off.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. The front outboard passengerseat is occupied by a smallerperson, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator will light andstay lit as a reminder that theairbags are off. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑17.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbags are active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passenger

frontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag, depending uponthe person's seating posture andbody build. Everyone in the vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints onpage 3‑37.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure that

the vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit, donot install a child restraint in thisvehicle and check with yourdealer.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.



Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

If the shoulder portion of the belt ispulled out all the way, the childrestraint locking feature will beengaged. This may unintentionallycause the passenger sensingsystem to turn the airbag(s) off forsome adult size occupants. If thishappens, let the belt go back all theway and start again.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system

operates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑25 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing the

vehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑16.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, inside rearviewmirror, front sensors, or airbagwiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seat

trim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑20.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicleis modified for any other reason, call

Customer Assistance. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑16. See your dealer forservice.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.



The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt until thechild passes the below fit test:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can be

thrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ WARNING

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.



Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

arms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facing

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

child restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) (Z06 and ZR1Models Only) on page 3‑33 orLower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) (Coupeand Convertible Models Only) onpage 3‑33. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctly

use and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.



Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System) (Coupeand ConvertibleModels Only)Some child restraints have a LATCHsystem. As part of the LATCHsystem, your child restraint mayhave lower attachments and/or a toptether. The LATCH system can helphold the child restraint in placeduring driving or in a crash. Somevehicles have lower and/or toptether anchors designed to secure achild restraint with lowerattachments and/or a top tether.

Some child restraints with a toptether are designed to be usedwhether the top tether is anchoredor not. Other child restraints requirethat the top tether be anchored.A national or local law may requirethat the top tether be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

Your vehicle does not have loweranchors or top tether anchors tosecure a child restraint with theLATCH system. If a national or locallaw requires that your top tether beanchored, do not use a childrestraint in this vehicle because atop tether cannot be properlyanchored. You must use the safetybelts to secure your child restraint inthis vehicle, unless a national orlocal law requires that the top tetherbe anchored. Refer to the childrestraint instructions andinstructions in this manual forsecuring a child restraint using thevehicle's safety belts. See SecuringChild Restraints on page 3‑37.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System) (Z06 andZR1 Models Only)Some child restraints have a LATCHsystem. As part of the LATCHsystem, your child restraint mayhave lower attachments and/or a toptether. The LATCH system can helphold the child restraint in placeduring driving or in a crash. Somevehicles have lower and/or toptether anchors designed to secure achild restraint with lowerattachments and/or a top tether.

Your vehicle does not have loweranchors to accommodate lowerattachments. Your vehicle doeshave a top tether anchor. If yourchild restraint has a top tether, makesure your child restraint is properlyinstalled using the top tether anchorand the vehicle's safety belt. A childrestraint must never be installedusing only the top tether andanchor.



Refer to your child restraintinstructions and see Securing ChildRestraints on page 3‑37 forinstructions on securing your childrestraint using the vehicle's safetybelts.

In order to use the top tetheranchors in your vehicle, you need achild restraint equipped with a toptether. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its top tether. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with the top tether inyour vehicle.

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some top tether-equipped childrestraints are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

Top Tether Anchor Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.



To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the trim cover.

The top tether anchor is locatedunder the cover behind thepassenger seat.

Securing a Child Restraint witha Top Tether

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

tighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.



Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

1. Secure the child restraint usingthe vehicle's safety belt. SeeSecuring Child Restraints onpage 3‑37.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Press the ribbed area of thetrim cover to open the coverand expose the anchor.

2.3. Route, attach and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.



Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child RestraintsThis vehicle has airbags. Inaddition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) under certainconditions. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑20 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑17 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑20 for additionalinformation.

Rear-facing child restraints shouldnot be installed in the vehicle, evenif the airbag(s) are off.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) (Z06 and ZR1 ModelsOnly) on page 3‑33 or LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) (Coupe andConvertible Models Only) on

page 3‑33 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedusing a safety belt and it uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) (Z06 and ZR1 ModelsOnly) on page 3‑33 or LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) (Coupe andConvertible Models Only) onpage 3‑33 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped), the offindicator on the passengerairbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when you startthe vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑17.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.



7. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) (Z06 and ZR1 ModelsOnly) on page 3‑33 or LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System)(Coupe and Convertible ModelsOnly) on page 3‑33 for moreinformation.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag or airbags are off, theoff indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑20 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up onthe lever. Use the key to lock andunlock the lighted glove box.

Cupholders

Slide the cover to access thecupholders.

Rear Storage

Convertible Shown, Coupe Similar

There may be storagecompartments in the floor of thehatch/trunk area; pull up to open thecover.

Some vehicles use the compartmentto store the battery and cannot beused for storage.

Notice: Do not store heavy orsharp objects in the rear storagecompartments located in thehatch/trunk area. The objectscould damage the underbody.


4-2 Storage

Rear Trunk Partition

For vehicles with the powerconvertible top option only, there isa trunk partition to keep cargo fromgetting in the way of the convertibletop. The trunk partition must be inplace for the convertible top tomove. If the trunk partition is notproperly in place, a message willdisplay. See Convertible TopMessages on page 5‑36.

The trunk partition is a flat carpetedboard with a horizontal flap that canbe attached to the top of the trunk todivide the storage compartment.It can be stored flat when not in use.

Pull the divider up and snap it ontoplace on both sides of the trunk.

Center Console StorageTo use this storage area, pull thecover up on the driver side frontedge of the center console andswing it to the passenger side.

Some vehicles might also haveinput jacks for auxiliary audiodevices. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑17.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with this feature, thesecurity shade can provide hiddenstorage in the rear area of thevehicle. The shade is also helpful inblocking the glare from theremovable roof when it is stored inthe rear compartment.


Storage 4-3

Using the Cargo Cover

1. Hook the elastic loops on thefront corners (A) of the shade tothe T-nuts located on the frontcorners of the rear hatch frame.

2. Hook the elastic loops on therear corners (B) of the shade tothe hooks recessed inside therear hatch frame, near the rearcorners.

3. Grasp the loop at the rear centerof the shade and wrap it aroundthe striker assembly.

4. Push the loop to the top of thestriker (base plate).

Convenience NetThe vehicle may have aconvenience net located in the rear,to store small loads as far forwardas possible. The net should not beused to store heavy loads.


4-4 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Boost Gauge (ZR1) . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

One-to-Four Shift Light(Manual Transmission) . . . . . 5-21

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-22Active Handling SystemLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-24Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-30

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-35Convertible Top Messages . . . 5-36Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-37Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-37Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-39Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-39Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-40Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-40Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 5-46Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-47Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-50Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-51

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-51


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-60Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever toward you.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Telescopic Steering Column

For vehicles with this feature, thetelescopic steering column control ison the right side of the steeringcolumn.

To adjust the telescopic steeringcolumn:

1. Push the switch forward to movethe wheel away from you.

2. Pull the switch toward you tomove the wheel closer to you.



The telescopic steering columnposition can be stored with yourmemory settings. See MemorySeats on page 3‑4.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with steering wheelcontrols, some audio controls canbe adjusted at the steering wheel.

b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Pressto silence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar® systems press and hold b/ g for longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth on page 7‑17 or OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

i (Phone On Hook): Press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call.

wx (Next/Previous): Press tochange radio stations or selecttracks on a CD.

To change radio stations:

. Pressw orx to go to the nextor to the previous radio stationand stay there. The radio onlyseeks stations with a strongsignal that are in theselected band.

. Press and holdw orx fortwo seconds until SCAN displaysand a beep sounds to scanstations. The radio goes to a

station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station.Press again to stop scanning.

. Press and holdw orx forfour seconds until PRESETSCAN displays and a beepsounds to scan presets. Theradio goes to a station, plays fora few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press again to stopscanning.

To select tracks on a CD:

. Pressw orx to go to the nextor to the previous track when aCD is playing.

. Press and holdw orx formore than two seconds to scanthe current CD. The CD goes tothe next track, plays the first10 seconds, then goes to thenext track. Press again to stopscanning.



. Press and holdw orx formore than four seconds to scanall of the CDs loaded. The CDgoes to the next CD, plays thefirst 10 seconds of each track,then goes to the next CD. Pressagain to stop scanning.

+ e − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the radiovolume.

1 to 6 (Preset Pushbuttons):Press to play stations that areprogrammed on the radio presetpushbuttons.

HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad to soundthe horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column.

Move the lever to the followingpositions:

w (High Speed): Use for fastwipes.

? (Low Speed): Use for slowwipes.

3 (Delay): Use to set a delaybetween wipes.

x (Delay Adjustment): Use for adelayed wiping cycle. Turn theintermittent adjust band down for alonger delay or up for a shorter

delay. The wiper speed can only bemanually adjusted when the lever isin this position.

9 (Off): Use to turn off thewindshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Use for a for a singlewiping cycle. For more wipes, holdthe lever down longer.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. If this occurs, a circuitbreaker will stop the wipers until themotor cools. Clear all ice and snowfrom the wiper blades before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen them or thaw them.Damaged wiper blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑40.

Windshield Washer

Press and hold the button at the endof the lever to spray washer fluid onthe windshield. The washer willspray until the button is released.The wipers will continue to clear the



window for about six seconds afterthe button is released and then stopor return to your preset speed.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

If the fluid in the windshield washerfluid reservoir is low a message mayappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. See WasherFluid Messages on page 5‑51. It willtake 15 seconds after the bottle isrefilled for this message to turn off.For information on the correctwasher fluid to use, see WasherFluid on page 10‑32 andRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Compass

Compass Operation

With the compass feature on, eachtime the vehicle is started, thecompass will take a few seconds toadjust and display the currentcompass heading. For example, NEis displayed for north-east.

Compass Calibration

PressP once to turn the compassdisplay on or off.

If after several seconds the displaydoes not show a compass heading,there may be a strong magneticfield interfering with the compass.Interference can be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If theletter C or CAL appears in thecompass window, the compassneeds calibration.

Depending on the mirror, in order tocalibrate, CAL must be displayed inthe mirror compass windows. If CAL

is not displayed, pressP forseveral seconds or until CAL isdisplayed.

If the compass has map lamps, itcan be placed in calibration modeby pressing and holding the left maplight button until a C appears on thecompass display.

The mirror compass can becalibrated by driving the vehicle incircles at 8 km/h (5 mph) or less untilthe display reads a direction.

Compass Variance

The mirror is set to zone eight.If you do not live in zone eight ordrive out of the area, the compassvariance needs to be changed tothe appropriate zone.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location andvariance zone number on thezone map that follows.



2. Press and holdP until a Z anda zone number displays. Thecompass is now in zone mode.

3. Once the zone number displays,pressP repeatedly until youreach the correct zone number.Stop pressingP and the mirrorreturns to normal operation.

ClockTo set the clock:

1. Press and hold H until thecorrect hour displays.

2. Press and hold M until thecorrect minute displays.

The clock mode automatically timesout with the changed display formatset as the current default setting.

To set the clock on a navigationsystem, see the navigation manual.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlet can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The accessory power outlet islocated inside the center consolestorage compartment, on theforward left side.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.



When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑50.

It is recommended that a qualifiedtechnician or dealer be seen for theproper installation of yourequipment.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterTo use the cigarette lighter, push itin all the way and let go. When it isready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

AshtraysThe ashtray and cigarette lighter arelocated on the instrument panel, infront of the shift lever. To use theashtray, press on the indentation atthe top of the door.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Loose objects, such as paper clips,can lodge behind and beneath theashtray lid and prevent movement ofthe lid. You should avoid puttingsmall, loose objects near theashtray.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Coupe and Convertible Shown, Metric Similar



Z06 and 427 Convertible – English Shown, Metric Similar



ZR1 – English Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the speedin either kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). For moreinformation see “Personal Options”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑51.

OdometerTo read the odometer with theignition off, turn on the parkinglamps.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, the mileage total of thenew odometer will be set to theoriginal kilometers (miles) of the oldodometer. See your dealer if theodometer must be replaced in thevehicle.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in thousands of revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Notice: Fuel shuts off at about6500 rpm for the base model,7000 rpm for the Z06 and 427Convertible models, and 6600rpm for the ZR1 model. If thevehicle continues to be driven atthe fuel shut off rpm, the enginecould be damaged. Be sure tooperate the vehicle below the fuelshut off rpm or reduce thevehicle's rpm quickly when thefuel shuts off.

Fuel Gauge

The fuel gauge shows how muchfuel the vehicle has left while theengine is on.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

When the needle approaches thelow fuel symbol, a chime soundsand LOW FUEL appears on theDriver Information Center (DIC)display. There is still a little fuel left,but the vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.

Press the RESET button toacknowledge a DIC message(s).Pressing the RESET button alsoturns off a DIC message but theLOW FUEL message comes onagain in 10 minutes if fuel is notadded to the vehicle.



Here are five things that someowners ask about. All these thingsare normal and do not indicate thatanything is wrong with the fuelgauge.. At the service station, the gas

pump shuts off before the gaugereads the full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated halffull, but it took a little more orless than half of the tank'scapacity to fill the tank.

. The gauge pointer may movewhile cornering, braking orspeeding up.

. The gauge may not indicate thetank is empty when the ignitionis turned off.

. The gauge reading may changeslightly within the first severalminutes after starting thevehicle.

See “DIC Operation and Displays”in Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑25 for more information.

Boost Gauge (ZR1)

Metric

English

This gauge indicates vacuum duringlight to moderate throttle and boostunder heavier throttle.

It displays the air pressure level inthe intake manifold before it entersthe engine's combustion chamber.

The gauge is automatically centeredat zero every time the engine isstarted. Actual vacuum or boost isdisplayed from this zero point.Changes in ambient pressure, suchas driving in mountains andchanging weather, will slightlychange the zero reading.



Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric

English

Metric — Z06, 427 Convertible,and ZR1 Models

English— Z06, 427 Convertible,and ZR1 Models

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.



The engine oil pressure gaugeshows the engine oil pressurein kPa (kilopascals) or psi (poundsper square inch) when the engine isrunning.

Oil pressure should be 140 to550 kPa (20 to 80 psi). In certainsituations such as long, extendedidles on hot days, it could read aslow as 40 kPa (6 psi) and still beconsidered normal. Oil pressuremay exceed 689 kPa (100 psi)when first started or whenaccelerating. It may vary withengine speed, outside temperatureand oil viscosity, but readings abovethe shaded area show the normaloperating range. Readings in theshaded area tell you that the engineis low on oil, or that you might havesome other oil problem. See EngineOil on page 10‑13.

The engine oil pressure can also bedisplayed using the gauges buttonon the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature. If the gaugepointer moves into the shaded area,the engine is too hot.

This means that the engine coolanthas overheated. If the vehicle hasbeen operating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑29 for more information.



Voltmeter Gauge

All Except ZR1

The voltmeter shows the voltageoutput of the battery. It shows thevoltage output of the chargingsystem while the engine is running.

The reading changes as the rate ofcharge changes (with engine speed,for example), but if the voltmeterreads at 9 volts or below, theinstrument panel cluster and othersystems may shut down. The DriverInformation Center (DIC) readsBATTERY VOLTAGE LOW whenthe vehicle is at 10 volts or below.

Have it checked right away. Drivingwith the voltmeter reading at10 volts or below could drain thebattery and disable the vehicle.

Safety Belt Reminders

Safety Belt Reminder Light

When the engine is started, a chimesounds for several seconds toremind a driver to fasten the safetybelt, unless the driver safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light comes on andstays on for several seconds, thenflashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated ifthe driver remains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion. If the driver

safety belt is already buckled,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3‑14.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.



{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑20 forimportant safety information. Therearview mirror has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or the on or off symbol, to let youknow the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbags.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag are allowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.



{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inService Only Mode, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,

have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑18 for more information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the OBDII system has detected a problemand diagnosis and service might berequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.



This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑47. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑45.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).



The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe vehicle is placed in ServiceOnly Mode and the malfunctionindicator lamp does not comeon. See your dealer forassistance in verifying properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered not

ready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

Metric English

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does notcome on, have it fixed so it is readyto warn if there is a problem.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.



If this warning light stays on afterthe engine is started, the parkingbrake may still be set or there couldbe a brake problem. Refer toParking Brake on page 9‑33 to seeif it is set. If the parking brake is notset, have the brake systeminspected right away.

If the light comes on while drivingand a CHECK BRAKE FLUIDmessage shows on the DIC, pull offthe road and stop carefully. Thepedal may be harder to push or thepedal may go closer to the floor.It may take longer to stop. If thelight is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing theVehicle on page 10‑79 and BrakeSystem Messages on page 5‑35 formore information.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.

If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑20.

One-to-Four Shift Light(Manual Transmission)

When this light comes on, thevehicle can only be shifted from1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) instead of1 (First) to 2 (Second).

The shift must be completed into4 (Fourth) to turn off this feature.This helps the vehicle get the bestpossible fuel economy.

After shifting to 4 (Fourth), thevehicle can be downshifted to alower gear.



Notice: Forcing the shift leverinto any gear except 4 (Fourth)when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT lightcomes on may damage thetransmission. Shift only from1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) when thelight comes on.

This light comes on when:. The engine coolant temperature

is higher than 76°C (169°F).. The vehicle is going 24 to

31 km/h (15 to 19 mph).. The vehicle is at 21 percent

throttle or less.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by your

dealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the traction control button.

This light and the Active Handlinglight come on when Active Handlingis turned off.

If the TCS is off, wheelspin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.

See Active Handling System onpage 9‑35 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑34 formore information.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly as theengine is started. If the light doesnot, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer. If the system is workingnormally the light goes off.

This light also comes on while thevehicle is in the CompetitiveDriving Mode.

For the ZR1 this light comes onwhen Performance Traction mode isactivated, along with DIC messagesfor the five traction modes.

This light comes on when the ActiveHandling system is turned off.If Active Handling is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.



If the TCS is off, the system doesnot assist in controlling the vehicle.Turn on the TCS and the ActiveHandling systems and the warninglight turns off.

See Active Handling System onpage 9‑35 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑34 formore information.

Active Handling SystemLight

The Active Handling System lightcomes on briefly while starting theengine. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on or comes onwhile driving, a chime sounds and aSERVICE ACTIVE HANDLINGSYSTEM message appears on theDIC and the vehicle need service.

When the Active Handling System isturned off, the light comes on, achime sounds, and the TRACTIONSYSTEM AND ACTIVEHANDLING– OFF messagedisplays in the DIC. The TractionControl System is off and the ActiveHandling System does not assistwith controlling the vehicle.

When the Active Handling System isturned back on, the light turns off, achime sounds, and the TRACTIONSYSTEM AND ACTIVEHANDLING– ON message displaysin the DIC.

See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑42 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5‑48. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑60.



When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑64.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem.

This light is also used to indicate thestatus of the anti-theft alarm systemwhen the ignition is turned off. Thelight will flash rapidly if the alarmsystem is arming and one or moreof the monitored entry points is notclosed. The light will stay on if thealarm is arming and all entry pointsare closed.

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Vehicle Alarm System onpage 2‑12.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The front fog lamp light comes onwhen the fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑5.



Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on whenever theparking lamps are on.

See Exterior Lamps Off Reminderon page 6‑2 for more information.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)displays on the instrument clusterand shows driver personalizationfeatures and warning/statusmessages.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis turned on. After displayingCORVETTE BY CHEVROLET, theDIC shows the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

If a problem is detected, a warningmessage appears on the DICdisplay. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑34 for more information.

DIC Operation and Displays

Depending on the features on thevehicle, the drive gear may displayon the DIC. See “Manual PaddleShift” under Automatic Transmission

on page 9‑25 and Head-Up Display(HUD) on page 5‑30 for moreinformation.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)has different modes which can beaccessed by pressing the followingbuttons located on the instrumentpanel, to the right of the instrumentcluster.

. 4 (Fuel): Press this button todisplay fuel information such as fueleconomy and range.



2 (Gauges): Press this button todisplay gauge information like oilpressure and temperature, coolanttemperature, automatic transmissionfluid temperature, if equipped,battery voltage, and front/rear tirepressures.

TRIP: Press this button to displayyour total and trip distance driven,the elapsed time function, youraverage speed, and the engineoil life.

OPTION: Press this button tochoose personal options that areavailable on your vehicle,depending on the options yourvehicle is equipped with, such asdoor locks, easy entry seats, andlanguage.

RESET: Press this button, usedalong with the other buttons, toreset system functions, selectpersonal options, and turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.

Fuel Button

The fuel button displays averagefuel economy and instantaneousfuel economy, calculated for yourspecific driving conditions, andrange information.

Average Fuel Economy: Theaverage fuel economy is viewed asa long-term approximation of youroverall driving conditions. Youshould reset the average fueleconomy display every time yourefuel. If you press the RESETbutton in this mode while you aredriving, the system will reset thisdisplay and begin figuring fueleconomy from that point in time.

Press the fuel button to displayaverage fuel economy, such as:. AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY

11.7 L/100 km or. AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY

20.1 MPG

Instantaneous Fuel Economy:Instantaneous fuel economy reflectsonly the fuel economy that thevehicle has right now and willchange frequently as drivingconditions change. Unlike averagefuel economy, this menu itemcannot be reset.

Press the fuel button again todisplay instantaneous fuel economy,such as:. INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY

11.7 L/100 km or. INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY

20.1 MPG

Fuel Range: The range calculatesthe remaining distance you candrive without refueling. It is basedon fuel economy and the fuelremaining in the tank.

Press the fuel button again todisplay the range, such as:. RANGE 48 km or. RANGE 30MI



If the LOW FUEL warning isdisplayed or if RANGE is less than64 km (40 miles), the display willread RANGE LOW.

The fuel economy data used todetermine fuel range is an averageof recent driving conditions. As yourdriving conditions change, this datais gradually updated automatically.

If the vehicle has been idling for along time, the range displayed onthe DIC could be abnormally low.The vehicle must be driven8 to 16 km (5 to 10 miles) to get anaccurate reading.

Gauges Button

The gauges button displays oilpressure, oil temperature, coolanttemperature, transmission fluidtemperature for automatictransmission vehicles only, batteryvoltage, and tire pressureinformation.

Oil Pressure: This display showsthe oil pressure.

Press the gauges button to displaythe oil pressure, such as:. OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa or. OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI

Oil Temperature: This displayshows the oil temperature.

Press the gauges button again todisplay the oil temperature, such as:. OIL TEMPERATURE 112°C or. OIL TEMPERATURE 234°F

If the oil temperature is low, thedisplay will show OILTEMPERATURE LOW. If the oiltemperature is high, the display willshow OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH.

Coolant Temperature: This displayshows the engine coolanttemperature.

Press the gauges button again todisplay the coolant temperature,such as:. COOLANT TEMPERATURE

51°C or. COOLANT

TEMPERATURE 123°F

If the coolant temperature is low, thedisplay will show COOLANTTEMPERATURE LOW. If thecoolant temperature is high, thedisplay will show COOLANTTEMPERATURE HIGH.

Transmission FluidTemperature: If you have anautomatic transmission vehicle, thisdisplay shows the automatictransmission fluid temperature.

Press the gauges button again todisplay the automatic transmissionfluid temperature, such as:. TRANS FLUID TEMP 51°C or. TRANS FLUID TEMP 123°F



If the transmission fluid temperatureis low, the display will show TRANSFLUID TEMP LOW. If thetransmission fluid temperature ishigh, the display will show TRANSFLUID TEMP HIGH.

Battery Voltage: This displayshows the current battery voltage.

Press the gauges button again todisplay the battery voltage, such as:. BATTERY VOLTAGE

13.5 VOLTS

Tire Pressure: This display showsthe tire pressure for each tire.

Press the gauges button again todisplay the tire pressure for the fronttires, such as:. FRONT TIRE PRESSURES

L 234 kPa R 228 kPa or. FRONT TIRE PRESSURES

L 34 PSI R 33 PSI

Press the gauges button again todisplay the tire pressure for the reartires, such as:. REAR TIRE PRESSURES

L 234 kPa R 228 kPa or. REAR TIRE PRESSURES

L 34 PSI R 33 PSI

TRIP Button

The TRIP button displays theodometer, trip distance, elapsedtime, average speed, and oil liferemaining information.

Odometer: The odometer showshow far your vehicle has beendriven in either kilometers or miles.Press the TRIP button to displayodometer readings, such as:. ODOMETER 20008 km or. ODOMETER 12345MI

You can also display the odometerby turning on the parking lamps.

Trip Odometers: There are two tripodometers. Press the TRIP buttonto display TRIP ODOMETERAreadings and press the button againto display TRIP ODOMETERBreadings, such as:. TRIP ODOMETER A 209.9 km or. TRIP ODOMETER A 130.5 MI. TRIP ODOMETER B 483.5 km or. TRIP ODOMETER B 300.5 MI

Both of the trip odometers can beused simultaneously. The tripodometers can be reset by pressingthe RESET button on the DIC.

The trip odometers are able todisplay up to 3217.9 km (1999.9 mi).This display will roll over to 0.0 if themaximum displayed miles orkilometers are reached.

There is also a miles since lastignition feature that displays thenumber of kilometers (miles) drivensince you last started the vehicle.Press and hold the RESET buttonfor three seconds, then release it.



The kilometers (miles) since the lastignition cycle will be set into the tripodometer.

Elapsed Timer: Press the TRIPbutton until ELAPSED TIMER isdisplayed, such asELAPSED TIMER .00.

When the ignition is in on, the DICcan be used as a stopwatch. Thedisplay can show hours, minutes,and seconds. The elapsed timeindicator will record up to 23 hours,59 minutes, and 59 seconds, then itwill reset to zero and continuecounting. The display appears asELAPSED TIMER .00 in the elapsedtime function.

You can start or stop the elapsedtime by pressing the RESET button.To reset the elapsed time to zero,press the RESET button forthree seconds while the timer isdisplayed.

Pressing and holding the RESETbutton for at least 10 seconds willreset the timer display to the timesince last ignition cycle.

Average Speed: Press the TRIPbutton until the average speed isdisplayed, such as:. AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h or. AVERAGE SPEED 62MPH

Press and hold the RESET button toreset to 0.0 km/h (mph).

Engine Oil Life: Press the TRIPbutton until the engine oil life isdisplayed, such as OIL LIFEREMAINING 89%.

This is an estimate of the engineoil's remaining useful life. It willshow 100% when the system isreset after an oil change. It will alertyou to change the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the system will alert you with themessage CHANGE ENGINE OIL.

Remember, you must reset theengine oil life system yourself aftereach oil change. It will not resetitself. To reset the system, seeEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑19. Be careful not to resetthe engine oil life systemaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change.

See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 and Engine Oil onpage 10‑13 for more information.

OPTION Button

The OPTION button allows you toaccess the PERSONAL OPTIONSmenu and customize thepersonalization settings on yourvehicle. See Vehicle Personalizationon page 5‑51 for more information.



RESET Button

The RESET button, used along withother buttons, will reset systemfunctions and turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ WARNING

If the HUD image is too bright,or too high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

For vehicles with the Head-UpDisplay (HUD), you can see someof the driver information thatappears on the instrument panelcluster.

The information may be displayed inEnglish or metric units and appearsas an image focused out toward thefront of the vehicle. The HUDconsists of the following information:. Speedometer. Turn Signal Indicators. High-Beam Indicator Symbol. Tachometer. Manual Paddle Shift Gear

Indicator (If Equipped)

These displays on the HUD arefor use when using the manualpaddle shift controls to shift thetransmission. See “ManualPaddle Shift” in AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑25.

. Shift Light

This light is used forperformance driving to indicatethat the vehicle's bestperformance level has beenreached to shift the transmissioninto the next higher gear. Anarrow pointing up will light up on

the display just prior to reachingthe engine fuel cut-off mode.This cut-off is about 6,500 rpmfor the LS3 engine, 6,600 rpmfor the LS9 & ZR1 engines, and7,000 rpm for the LS7 engine.

. Check Gauges Warning

. Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge

. Transmission Fluid TemperatureGauge, (Automatic TransmissionVehicles Only)

. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge

. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

. G-Force Gauge

. Boost Gauge (If Equipped)

. Audio Functions, StreetMode Only

. Navigation, Only with NavigationRadio, Turn-by-Turn Guidance.Street Mode Only



There are three HUD modes thatcan be viewed in the HUD display.Press the MODE button to scrollthrough these modes in thefollowing order:

English

Metric

Street Mode supports audio andnavigation functions with yourchoice of tachometer settings.

English

Metric

Track Mode 1 supports the G-Forcegauge and minor gauges with acircular tachometer.

English

Metric

Track Mode 2 supports G-Forcegauges, boost gauge w/ZR1, andminor gauges with a lineartachometer.

When the desired HUD display hasbeen selected, release the MODEbutton.



Within each mode, the display, canbe further customized by pressingthe PAGE button. Pressing thisbutton in each mode will turn off andon the following:. Street Mode — No tachometer,

circular tachometer, and lineartachometer.

. Track Modes 1 and 2 — Nominor gauge, coolanttemperature, transmission oiltemperature (AutomaticTransmission only), engine oiltemperature, engine oilpressure, and boost gauge.

While in Track Mode 1 or 2, themaximum G value achievedduring the current ignition cyclecan be displayed by pressingand holding the PAGE button.The maximum G display will beshown until the PAGE button isreleased. The maximum G valuedisplay will be identical to thenormal G value display,except the maximum G gauge

digits (X.XXG) andcorresponding G gauge bar willoverwrite the current G value.

English

Metric

Be sure to continue scanning thedisplays, controls, and drivingenvironment just as you would in avehicle without HUD. If you neverlook at the instrument panel cluster,you may miss something important,such as a warning light. Underimportant warning conditions, theCHECK GAGES warning will

illuminate in the HUD. View yourDriver Information Center (DIC) formore information.

The HUD controls are located to theleft of the steering wheel.



To adjust the HUD so it can be seenproperly, do the following:

1. Start the engine and press theHUD dimmer control all the wayup by pressing the (+) button.

The brightness of the HUDimage is determined by the lightconditions in the direction thevehicle is facing and where youhave the HUD dimmer controlset. If you are facing a darkobject or a heavily shaded area,the HUD may anticipate that youare entering a dark area andmay begin to dim.

It is possible for sunlight to enterthe HUD making it difficult to seethe image. The display willreturn to normal when thesunlight is no longer enteringthe HUD.

2. Adjust the seat to a comfortabledriving position. If your seatposition changes, the HUD mayneed to be re-adjusted.

3. Press the up or down arrows tocenter the HUD image inyour view.

The HUD image can only beadjusted up and down, not sideto side.

4. Press the dimmer controldownward until the HUD imageis no brighter than necessary.

To turn HUD off, press and hold the(–) button until the HUD displayturns off.

If the sun comes out or it becomescloudy, the HUD brightness mayneed to be adjusted again using thedimmer control. Polarizedsunglasses could make the HUDimage harder to see.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in one of six languagesincluding English, Spanish, French,German, Italian, or Japanese. Thespeedometer can be displayed ineither English or metric units.

To change the language and unitselections, see “Entering thePersonal Options Menu” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑51.

Clean the inside of the windshieldas needed to remove any dirt or filmthat reduces the sharpness or clarityof the HUD image.

To clean the HUD, spray householdglass cleaner on a soft, clean cloth.Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dryit. Do not spray cleaner directly onthe lens because the cleaner couldleak into the unit.



If the ignition is on and the HUDimage cannot be seen, check tosee if:. Something is covering the

HUD unit.. The HUD dimmer control is

adjusted properly.. The HUD image is adjusted to

the proper height.. Ambient light is low, in the

direction the vehicle is facing.. A fuse is blown. See Fuses and

Circuit Breakers on page 10‑45.

Keep in mind that the windshield ispart of the HUD system. SeeWindshield Replacement onpage 10‑41.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing the RESET button.

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed. Allmessages should be taken seriouslyand clearing the messages does notcorrect the problem.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saver

system starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatfeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery. Turn off unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH

See Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑16.

BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW

See Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑16.

SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM

If this message displays while youare driving, there may be a problemwith the electrical charging system.It could mean that there is a looseor broken drive belt or that there isanother electrical problem. Have thevehicle checked right away by yourdealer. Driving while this message ison could drain the battery.



If you must drive a short distancewith the message on, be certain toturn off the vehicle's accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.

Multiple chimes sound when thismessage is displayed.

To acknowledge the message, pressthe RESET button. The messagereappears every 10 minutes untilthis condition changes.

Brake System Messages

ABS (Antilock Brake System)ACTIVE

This message displays when theAntilock Brake System (ABS) isadjusting brake pressure to helpavoid a braking skid.

Slippery road conditions may exist ifthis message is displayed, so adjustyour driving accordingly. Themessage stays on for a fewseconds after the system stops

adjusting brake pressure. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS) onpage 9‑32 for more information.

CHANGE BRAKE PADS

On vehicles with electronic brakepad wear sensors, this message willbe displayed when the pads areworn. See your dealer for service.

CHECK BRAKE FLUID

This message displays, a sound willbe heard, and the brake systemwarning light on the instrumentpanel cluster turns on if the ignitionis on to inform the driver that thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeSystem Warning Light onpage 5‑20. Have the brake systemserviced by your dealer as soon aspossible. See Brakes onpage 10‑32.

SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES

If this message displays while youare driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Then start the engine again to reset

the system. If the message stayson, or comes back on again whileyou are driving, the vehicle is inneed of service. See your dealer.If the antilock brake system (ABS)warning light is on and the regularbrake system warning light is noton, you still have brakes, but do nothave ABS. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on, youdo not have ABS and there is aproblem with the brakes. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 5‑21 andBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑20.

If this message is displayed, theTraction Control System (TCS) andthe Active Handling System will alsobe disabled. The DIC will scrollthree messages: SERVICEANTILOCK BRAKES, SERVICETRACTION SYSTEM, andSERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING, andthe instrument panel cluster lightswill come on along with a sound.When the service message isdisplayed, the computer controlled



systems will not assist the driver.Have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible. Adjustyour driving accordingly.

To acknowledge these messages,press the RESET button.

Convertible TopMessages

ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION

If the vehicle has a powerconvertible top, this messagedisplays and a sound will be heard ifthe trunk partition is not in place.Open the hatch/trunk and makesure the trunk partition is secureand no objects are on the trunkpartition. See Rear Storage onpage 4‑1 for more information.

CLOSE TRUNK TO MOVE TOP

This message displays and a soundwill be heard if the trunk is openwhile you are trying to operate theconvertible top. Make sure the trunk

is closed before operating theconvertible top. See Convertible Topon page 2‑22.

SET PARK BRAKE TOMOVE TOP

If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, this message displaysand a sound will be heard if you tryto operate the power convertible topwithout first setting the parkingbrake. Set the parking brake beforetrying to operate the powerconvertible top. See Convertible Topon page 2‑22 for more information.

SHIFT TO PARK OR SET PARKBRAKE FOR TOP

If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, this message displaysand a sound will be heard if you tryto operate the power convertible topwithout first shifting into P (Park) orsetting the parking brake. Eithershift the vehicle into P (Park) or setthe parking brake before trying to

operate the power convertible top.See Convertible Top on page 2‑22for more information.

TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the powerconvertible top button is pressedand the power convertible top pumpmotor temperature is below −20°C(−4°F). Wait for the powerconvertible top pump motor to warmup before using the powerconvertible top.

TOP MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the powerconvertible top button is pressedand the power convertible top pumpmotor temperature is over 105°C(221°F). Wait for the powerconvertible top pump motor to cooldown before using the powerconvertible top.



TOP NOT SECURE

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the powerconvertible top button is releasedbefore the top open or closeoperation is complete or if the top isclosed without the header latchengaged. Press and hold theconvertible top button to fully openor close the top, and make sure thatthe header latch is engaged afterthe top is closed.

UNLATCH HEADER TOMOVE TOP

This message displays and a soundwill be heard if you try to lower theconvertible top without firstunlocking the top. Move the latchhandle to unlock the convertible top.See Convertible Top on page 2‑22.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE DISENGAGED

This message displays briefly whenyou disengage the cruise controlsystem by stepping on the brake on

an automatic transmission vehicle orthe clutch on a manual transmissionvehicle, or by turning off the cruisecontrol switch. See Cruise Controlon page 9‑42 for more information.

CRUISE SET TO XXXMPH(XXX km/h)

See Cruise Control on page 9‑42.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR AJAR

This message displays if the driverdoor is not closed properly. Makesure that the door is closedcompletely.

HATCH AJAR (Coupe)

This message displays when thehatch is not closed completely.Make sure that the hatch is closedcompletely. See Hatch on page 2‑10for more information.

PASSENGER DOOR AJAR

This message displays if thepassenger door is not closedproperly. Make sure that the door isclosed completely.

TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible)

This message displays when theconvertible top is not closedcompletely. Make sure that the topis closed completely. SeeConvertible Top on page 2‑22 formore information.

TRUNK AJAR (Convertible)

This message displays when thetrunk is not closed completely. Makesure that the trunk is closedcompletely. See Hatch on page 2‑10for more information.



Engine Cooling SystemMessages

CHECK COOLANT LEVEL

This message displays when theengine coolant level is low. Havethe cooling system serviced by yourdealer as soon as possible. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑26.

COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE

This message displays and a soundwill be heard if the engine coolantexceeds 124°C (255°F). If you havebeen operating the vehicle undernormal driving conditions, pull offthe road, stop the vehicle, and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.

You can monitor the coolanttemperature with the gauges buttonon the DIC or the engine coolanttemperature gauge on the

instrument panel cluster. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑29,Driver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25, and Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑15.

To acknowledge the message, pressthe RESET button. The messageand sound will come back on untilthis condition changes. If you do notpress the RESET button, themessage remains on until thecondition changes.

ENGINE OVERHEATED– STOPENGINE

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the engine hasoverheated. Stop and turn theengine off immediately to avoidsevere engine damage. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑29.

ENGINE PROTECTIONREDUCE ENGINE RPM

This message displays if the engineoil temperature exceeds 160°C(320°F). Check the engine coolanttemperature and engine oil level.If the engine is too hot, see EngineOverheating on page 10‑29. Thevehicle may need service, so seeyour dealer.

You can monitor the oil temperaturewith the gauges button on the DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑25.

Multiple chimes sound when thismessage is displayed. Thismessage remains displayed andactive until the issue is resolved.



HOT ENGINE AIRCONDITIONING OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor is automatically turnedoff. When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the A/C operationautomatically resumes. You cancontinue to drive the vehicle. If thismessage continues to appear, havethe system repaired by your dealeras soon as possible to avoidcompressor damage.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL

This message displays when the lifeof the engine oil has expired. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3. After an oil change, theengine oil life system must be reset.

See “Engine Oil Life” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25. Also, see Engine Oil onpage 10‑13 and Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10‑19 for moreinformation.

CHECK OIL LEVEL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays and two chimes sound ifthe oil level in the vehicle is low.Once the vehicle senses a changein the engine oil level, the lightremains off.

If this message appears afterstarting the engine, the engine oillevel may be too low. You may needto add oil. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑29.


LOW OIL PRESSURE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. If thismessage appears while the engineis running, stop the engine and donot operate it until the cause of lowoil pressure is corrected. Severedamage to the engine can result.A sound will be heard when thismessage is displayed. See EngineOil on page 10‑13.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE DRAG CONTROLACTIVE

This message displays when enginedrag control is active. When drivingin a lower gear in rainy, snowy,or icy conditions and then letting upon the accelerator or downshifting,the rear wheels may begin to slipand this message displays. Thismessage stays on for a fewseconds following the engine dragcontrol event.



REDUCED ENGINE POWER

If this message displays and thecheck engine light comes on, anoticeable reduction in the vehicle'sperformance may occur. If theREDUCED ENGINE POWERmessage is displayed, but there isno reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven.

The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while the REDUCEDENGINE POWER message isdisplayed, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytime thecheck engine light stays on, thevehicle should be taken to yourdealer as soon as possible fordiagnosis and repair. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18 for more information.

Multiple chimes sound when thismessage is displayed.

To acknowledge the message, pressthe RESET button. The messagereappears every five minutes untilthis condition changes.

If the REDUCED ENGINE POWERmessage is displayed incombination with the COOLANTOVER TEMPERATURE message,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑29.

Fuel System Messages

CHECK GAS CAP

This message displays if the fuelcap has not been fully tightened.Check the fuel cap to make surethat it is on properly. Oncetightened, it takes at least oneovernight park to reset or clear thismessage. If both the CHECK GASCAP message and the malfunctionindicator lamp in the instrumentpanel cluster are on, you may needto see your dealer for service. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18 for more information.

LOW FUEL

This message displays when thefuel tank is less than 10 percent fulland the display is turned off.A sound will be heard when thismessage is displayed. Refill the fueltank as soon as possible. See FuelGauge on page 5‑12.

SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM

This message displays if thePowertrain Control Module (PCM)has detected a problem within thefuel system. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. Thismessage also displays when thecluster is not getting fuel informationfrom the PCM.

Key and Lock Messages

FOB AUTOLEARN WAITXXMINUTES

See “Matching Transmitter(s) toYour Vehicle” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.



FOB BATTERY LOW

See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

KNOWN FOB


MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBSLEARNED


NO FOBS DETECTED

This message displays if the vehicledoes not detect the presence of aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when you haveattempted to start the vehicle or avehicle door has just closed. Thefollowing conditions may cause thismessage to appear.. Driver-added equipment plugged

into the accessory power outleton the center console is causinginterference. Examples of thesedevices are cell phones and cellphone chargers, two-way radios,power inverters, or similar items.Try moving the RKE transmitteraway from these devices whenstarting the vehicle. In addition,PDA devices and remote garageand gate openers may alsogenerate ElectromagneticInterference (EMI) that mayinterfere with the RKEtransmitter. Do not carry theRKE transmitter in the samepocket or bag as these devices.

. The vehicle is experiencingElectromagneticInterference (EMI). Somelocations, such as airports,automatic toll booths, and somegas stations have EMI fieldswhich may interfere with theRKE transmitter.

If moving the transmitter todifferent locations within thevehicle does not help, place thetransmitter in the glove boxtransmitter pocket with thebuttons facing to the right andthen press the START button.



. The vehicle's battery voltage islow. The battery voltage must beabove 10 volts for the RKEtransmitter to be detectedproperly.

NO FOB - OFF OR RUN?

This message displays when theRKE transmitter is not detectedinside the vehicle while you aretrying to turn the ignition off. Thevehicle may be near a strong radioantenna signal causing the RKEsystem to be jammed. The vehiclewill remain in ACCESSORY until thevehicle is turned off or is restarted,or five minutes has expired. If youturn the ignition off and you cannotfind the RKE transmitter, you will notbe able to restart the vehicle. TheRKE transmitter needs to be insidethe vehicle in order for the vehicle tostart. See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑20 for more information.

OFF–ACCESSORY TO LEARN


READY FOR FOB #X


Lamp Messages

HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED

This message displays if it is darkenough outside and the headlampsand the Twilight Sentinel® controlsare off. This message informs thedriver that turning on the exteriorlamps is recommended. It hasbecome dark enough outside torequire the headlamps and/or otherexterior lamps.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a soundwill be heard if a turn signal is lefton for 1.2 km (three-quarters of amile). Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the offposition.

To acknowledge this message,press the RESET button.

Ride Control SystemMessages

ACTIVE HANDLING

This message displays when theActive Handling System isoperating. The Active HandlingSystem is a computer controlledsystem that assists the driver incontrolling the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. You may feel orhear the system working and seethe ACTIVE HANDLING messagedisplayed in the DIC. This messagestays on for a few seconds followingthe active handling event. This isnormal when the system is



operating. See Active HandlingSystem on page 9‑35 and Brakingon page 9‑3.

ACTIVE HANDLING READY

This message displays when thefunctional check of the ActiveHandling System has beencompleted. See Active HandlingSystem on page 9‑35 for moreinformation.

COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the CompetitiveDriving mode is selected. Theinstrument panel cluster light will beon when the Competitive Drivingmode is selected. If your vehicle isequipped with a manualtransmission, Launch Control isavailable when this mode isselected. The Traction ControlSystem (TCS) will not be operatingwhile in the Competitive Drivingmode. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. This system is availableon all models except Z06 with

Magnetic Ride Control. SeeCompetitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑36, including the “LaunchControl” information.

MAXIMUM SPEED 129 km/h(80MPH)

This message displays when amalfunction is present in theSelective Ride Control system. Thevehicle speed will be limited to avalue determined by the vehiclewhen the shock absorber systemhas failed and the shocks are intheir full soft mode. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.


PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVEHANDLING ON

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when this PerformanceTraction Management mode isselected. The instrument panel

cluster light will also be on whenthis mode is selected. LaunchControl is available when this modeis selected. In this mode theTraction Control and ActiveHandling System are available butintended for use on wet race trackconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. This system is availableonly on ZR1 and Z06 models. See“Performance TractionManagement” and “Launch Control”under Competitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑36 for more informationabout the use of this mode.

PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVEHANDLING ON

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when this PerformanceTraction Management mode isselected. The instrument panelcluster light will also be on whenthis mode is selected. LaunchControl is available when this modeis selected. In this mode theTraction Control and ActiveHandling System are available but



intended for use on dry race trackconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. This system is availableonly on ZR1 and Z06 models. See“Performance TractionManagement” and “Launch Control”under Competitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑36 for more informationabout the use of this mode.

PERF TRAC 3 – SPORTACTIVE HANDLING ON

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when this PerformanceTraction Management mode isselected. The instrument panelcluster light will also be on whenthis mode is selected. LaunchControl is available when this modeis selected. In this mode theTraction Control and ActiveHandling System are available butintended for use on dry race trackconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. This system is availableonly on ZR1 and Z06 models. See“Performance TractionManagement” and “Launch Control”

under Competitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑36 for more informationabout the use of this mode.

PERF TRAC 4 – SPORTACTIVE HANDLING OFF

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when this PerformanceTraction Management mode isselected. The instrument panelcluster light will also be on whenthis mode is selected. LaunchControl is available when this modeis selected. In this mode theTraction Control is available butintended for use on dry race trackconditions. The Active HandlingSystem is disabled when this modeis selected. This mode will requiremore driver skill than modes 1-3.Adjust your driving accordingly. Thissystem is available only on ZR1 andZ06 models. See “PerformanceTraction Management” and “LaunchControl” under Competitive DrivingMode on page 9‑36 for moreinformation about the use ofthis mode.

PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVEHANDLING OFF

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when this PerformanceTraction Management mode isselected. The instrument panelcluster light will also be on whenthis mode is selected. LaunchControl is available when this modeis selected. In this mode theTraction Control is available butintended for use on dry race trackconditions. The Active HandlingSystem is disabled when this modeis selected. This mode will requiremore driver skill than modes 1-4.Adjust your driving accordingly. Thissystem is available only on ZR1 andZ06 models. See “PerformanceTraction Management” and “LaunchControl” under Competitive DrivingMode on page 9‑36 for moreinformation about the use ofthis mode.



SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLINGSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Active HandlingSystem and the vehicle needsservice. The active handling systemlight on the instrument panel clusteralso turns on and a sound will beheard. See your dealer. When thismessage is displayed, the system isnot working. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Active HandlingSystem on page 9‑35 for moreinformation.

SERVICE RIDE CONTROL

This message displays when theSelective Ride Control system hasdetected a malfunction and thesystem must be serviced. See yourdealer. If a fault is present in theSelective Ride Control systemwhich causes the shocks to be intheir full soft condition, themessages SERVICE RIDECONTROL, SHOCKSINOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUMSPEED 129 km/h (80 MPH) will

display together. See Selective RideControl on page 9‑40 for moreinformation.

SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM

If this message displays when youare driving, there is a problem withthe Traction Control System (TCS)and the vehicle is in need ofservice. See your dealer. When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

The traction control system (TCS)warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster will also turn on and asound will be heard.

When this message is displayed,the computer controlled systems willnot assist the driver in controllingthe vehicle. Have the systemrepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑34 formore information.

To acknowledge the message, pressthe RESET button.

SHOCKS INOPERATIVE

This message displays when amalfunction is present in theSelective Ride Control systemwhich is causing the shocks to be intheir full soft mode. This is awarning to the driver that the vehiclehandling may be affected. Have thevehicle serviced by your dealer assoon as possible.

To acknowledge the message, pressthe RESET button . The messagereappears every 10 minutes untilthis condition changes.

TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) islimiting wheel spin. Slippery roadconditions may exist if this messageis displayed, so adjust your drivingaccordingly. The message stays onfor a few seconds after the TCS



stops limiting wheel spin. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑34 for more information.

TRACTION SYSTEM ANDACTIVE HANDLING – OFF

This message displays, theinstrument panel cluster light turnson, and a sound will be heard whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)and Active Handling System areturned off by pressing the ActiveHandling System button on thecenter console for five seconds. TheAntilock Brake System (ABS)remains on with the TCS and ActiveHandling System off. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 9‑34and Active Handling System onpage 9‑35 for more information.

To acknowledge this message,press the RESET button.

TRACTION SYSTEM ANDACTIVE HANDLING – ON

If the Traction Control System (TCS)and Active Handling System are off,this message displays briefly, theinstrument panel cluster light turnsoff, and a sound will be heard whenthe TCS and Active HandlingSystem are turned on by brieflypressing the Active HandlingSystem button on the centerconsole. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑34 andActive Handling System onpage 9‑35 for more information.

TRACTION SYSTEM – OFF

This message displays and stayson, a sound will be heard, when theTCS is turned off by pressing theActive Handling System button onthe center console. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 9‑34for more information.

To acknowledge the message, pressthe RESET button.

TRACTION SYSTEM – ON

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the TractionControl System (TCS) is turned onby pressing the Active HandlingSystem button on the centerconsole. This messageautomatically clears from the DICdisplay on its own. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 9‑34for more information.

Safety Belt Messages

BUCKLE PASSENGER

This message reminds you tobuckle the passenger's safety belt.

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the ignition is on,the driver's safety belt is buckled,the passenger's safety belt isunbuckled with the passengerairbag enabled, and the vehicle is inmotion. You should have thepassenger buckle their safety belt.



The reminder will be repeated if theignition is on, the vehicle is inmotion, the driver is buckled, thepassenger is still unbuckled, and thepassenger airbag is enabled. If thepassenger's safety belt is alreadybuckled, this message will notcome on.

BUCKLE SEATBELT

This message reminds you tobuckle the driver's safety belt.

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when the ignition is on,the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,and the vehicle is in motion. Youshould buckle your safety belt.

If the driver remains unbuckledwhen the ignition is on and thevehicle is in motion, the reminderwill be repeated. If the driver'ssafety belt is already buckled, thismessage will not come on.

This message is an additionalreminder to the safety belt reminderlight in the instrument panel cluster.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑16 for more information.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AIR CONDITIONING

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if you noticea drop in heating and airconditioning efficiency.

SERVICE ELECTRICALSYSTEM

This message displays if anelectrical problem has occurredwithin the Powertrain ControlModule (PCM). Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays and a soundwill be heard when there may be anelectrical or another system problemwith the vehicle. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer if thismessage keeps appearing.

Starting the VehicleMessages

PRESS BRAKE TO STARTENGINE (AutomaticTransmission Only)

This message displays if you try tostart the engine by pressing thekeyless ignition start button withouthaving the brake pressed. Thebrake needs to be pressed whenstarting the engine. See IgnitionPositions on page 9‑18 for moreinformation.



Tire Messages

HIGH TIRE PRESSURE

This message may be displayedwhen one or more of the tires isoverinflated. This message alsodisplays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHTREAR to indicate which tire isaffected. You can receive more thanone tire pressure message at atime. To read other messages thatmay have been sent at the sametime, press the RESET button . If atire pressure message appears onthe DIC, stop as soon as you can.Have the tire pressures checkedand set to those shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeRun-Flat Tires on page 10‑53,Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12,Tire Pressure on page 10‑60, andTire Pressure Monitor System onpage 10‑62. The DIC also showsthe tire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.

To acknowledge the message, pressthe RESET button. A messagereappears every 10 minutes until thecondition is corrected.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRELOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

{ WARNING

When the LOW TIREPRESSURE or TIRE FLATmessage is displayed on theDriver Information Center, yourvehicle's handling capabilities willbe reduced during severemaneuvers. The active handlingsystem will be affected. SeeActive Handling System onpage 9‑35. If you drive too fast,you could lose control of yourvehicle. You or others could beinjured. Do not drive over 90 km/h(55 mph) when the LOW TIREPRESSURE or TIRE FLAT

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

message is displayed. Drivecautiously and check your tirepressures as soon as you can.

This message displays when one ormore of the tires is underinflated.This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatewhich tire is affected. Multiplechimes sound and the tire pressurelight on the instrument panel clusterturns on when this message isdisplayed. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 5‑23. You can receive morethan one tire pressure message at atime. To read other messages thatmay have been sent at the sametime, press the RESET button. If atire pressure message appears onthe DIC, stop as soon as you can.



Have the tire pressures checkedand set to those shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeRun-Flat Tires on page 10‑53,Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12,Tire Pressure on page 10‑60, andTire Pressure Monitor System onpage 10‑62. The DIC also showsthe tire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.


SERVICE TIRE MONITOR

This message displays if a part onthe Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) is not workingproperly. The tire pressure light alsoflashes and then remains on duringthe same ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑23.Several conditions may cause thismessage to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑64 for more information.

If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE FLAT

{ WARNING

When the LOW TIREPRESSURE or TIRE FLATmessage is displayed on theDriver Information Center, yourvehicle's handling capabilities willbe reduced during severemaneuvers. If you drive too fast,you could lose control of yourvehicle. You or others could beinjured. Do not drive over 55 mph(90 km/h) when the LOW TIREPRESSURE or TIRE FLATmessage is displayed. Drivecautiously and check your tirepressures as soon as you can.

This message displays when one ormore of the tires is flat. Thismessage also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatewhich tire is affected. Multiplechimes sound and the tire pressurelight on the instrument panel clustercomes on when this message isdisplayed. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 5‑23.

This message is followed by theMAXIMUM SPEED 90 km/h(55 MPH) message, and then by theREDUCED HANDLING message.The Active Handling System willintervene more quickly when a flattire has been detected. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread other messages that may havebeen sent at the same time, pressthe RESET button. If a tire pressuremessage appears on the DIC, stopas soon as you can. Have the tirepressures checked and set to thoseshown on the Tire and Loading



Information label. See Run-FlatTires on page 10‑53, Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12, Tire Pressureon page 10‑60, and Tire PressureMonitor System on page 10‑62. TheDIC also shows the tire pressurevalues. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.


Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer for service.

SHIFT TO PARK

If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, this message displaysif the vehicle is not in P (Park) whenthe engine is being turned off. Thevehicle will be in ACCESSORY.Once the shift lever is moved toP (Park), the vehicle will turn off.

The vehicle will remain inACCESSORY, without the 20 minutetime-out period, until the shift leveris moved to P (Park) or until thedriver presses the pushbutton torestart the vehicle. See IgnitionPositions on page 9‑18 for moreinformation.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays and fourchimes sound if the transmissionfluid temperature rises above 132°C(270°F) or rises rapidly. Thetransmission may shift gears orapply the torque converter clutch toreduce the fluid temperature. Drivingaggressively or driving on long hillscan cause the transmission fluidtemperature to be higher thannormal. If this message appears,you may continue to drive at aslower speed. Monitor thetransmission fluid temperature andallow it to cool to at least 110°C(230°F). The transmission fluidtemperature can be monitored with

the gauges button on the DIC. See“DIC Operation and Displays” underDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25 and AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 10‑20.Also check the engine coolanttemperature. If it is also hot, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑29.

If this message is displayed duringnormal vehicle operation on flatroads, the vehicle may needservice. See your dealer for aninspection.

If driving in a performance orcompetitive manner, the use of(S) Sport Automatic Mode or(S) Sport Manual Paddle Shift gearselection is recommended. SeeAutomatic Transmission onpage 9‑25 for more information.

To acknowledge the message, pressthe RESET button. The messagereappears every 10 minutes untilthis condition changes. If you do notpress the RESET button, themessage remains on the displayuntil the condition changes.



UPSHIFT NOW

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑29.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ACCESSORY MODE ON

This message displays when thevehicle is in accessory mode.

ICE POSSIBLE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE

This message displays for a fewseconds if a RKE transmitter that isnot labeled 1 or 2 is used and youtry to personalize the features onthe vehicle by pressing the OPTIONbutton. The personalization systemwill not recognize the transmitterand the DIC will not display the

current driver number or the menusused to set personalizations. Thepersonalization features will then beset to the default states. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑51 for more information.

SET PARK BRAKE FOR SEATRECALL

If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, this message displaysif you try to recall the memorypositions when the ignition is on andthe parking brake is not set. If thevehicle is on, you must set theparking brake in order for thememory positions to recall. SeeMemory Seats on page 3‑4 for moreinformation.

Washer Fluid Messages

CHECK WASHER FLUID

See Washer Fluid on page 10‑32.

VehiclePersonalizationMany features on your vehicle canbe personalized. This means thatthe operation of these features canbe set to operate differentlydepending on who is driving thevehicle. See “Personal Options”later in this section for the featuresthat you can personalize.

The personalization settings forother features are automaticallyupdated and saved as the driveradjusts them. These include thefollowing settings and presets:. The radio presets, tone, volume,

fade, balance, equalization (EQ)settings, and source (radioor CD).

. The last climate control setting.

. The Head-Up Display (HUD)position and dimming level,if your vehicle has this feature.



. The instrument panel clusterdimming level and last selectedDIC display.

Separate personalization settingsare saved for two different drivers.One of the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitters is assigned todriver 1. The other is assigned todriver 2. The backs of the RKEtransmitters are labelled 1 or 2 tocorrespond to each driver.

The current driver's preferences arerecalled when one of the followingoccurs:. The lock or unlock button on the

RKE transmitter, labelled 1 or 2,is pressed.

. The appropriate memorybutton, 1 or 2, located on thedriver door is pressed. SeeMemory Seats on page 3‑4 formore information.

. A valid RKE transmitter isdetected upon opening thedriver door.

If more than one valid RKEtransmitter is detected upon openingthe driver door, the driverpreferences for the lowest drivernumber will be recalled.

If an RKE transmitter that is notlabelled 1 or 2 is used, thepersonalization system will notrecognize the transmitter. The DriverInformation Center (DIC) will notdisplay a current driver number andthe features that are normallyprogrammed through the DIC will beset to the default states. Also, if theOPTION button is pressed, the DICdoes not display the menus used toset personalizations, but insteaddisplays OPTIONS UNAVAILABLEfor a few seconds.

Entering the PersonalOptions Menu

To enter the personal options menu,use the following steps:

1. If you have an automatictransmission vehicle, turn thevehicle on with the shift lever inP (Park).

If you have a manualtransmission vehicle, turn thevehicle on with the parkingbrake set.

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the OPTION button andyou will enter the PERSONALOPTIONS menu.



The DIC will display the currentdriver number (1 or 2) for a fewseconds and then will displayinstructions on which buttons touse for setting thepersonalizations. The RESETbutton is used to select a settingfor a particular feature. TheOPTION button is used to moveto the next feature.

3. Press the OPTION button whilethe instruction screen isdisplayed to enter the firstpersonalization menu item.

4. Once you have cycled throughall of the personal options,pressing the OPTION button afinal time exits the personaloptions menu. In addition, if nobutton is pressed within45 seconds, the DIC will exit thepersonal options menu.

Personal Options

The following options are availablefor programming:

Display Units: This option allowsyou to choose the measurementunits.

Press the OPTION button untilDISPLAY UNITS appears on thedisplay, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the followingmodes:. ENGLISH (default). METRIC

If you choose ENGLISH, allinformation will be displayed inEnglish units.

If you choose METRIC, allinformation will be displayed inmetric units.

When the mode you want isselected, press the OPTION buttonto set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.

Auto Memory Recall (AutomaticTransmission only): If yourautomatic transmission vehicle hasthe memory package, you may havethis option. This option allows thedriver seat, the telescopic steeringcolumn, if your vehicle has thisfeature, and the outside rearviewmirrors to automatically move to thecurrent driver's set position whenthe engine starts.

Press the OPTION button untilAUTO MEMORY RECALL appearson the display, then press theRESET button to scroll through thefollowing modes:. YES. NO (default)

If you choose YES, the driver seat,the outside rearview mirrors and thetelescopic steering column, if yourvehicle has this feature, positionsare recalled when you turn theignition on.

If you choose NO, this option willturn off.




Auto Exit Recall: If your vehiclehas the memory package, you mayhave this option. This option allowsthe driver seat and telescopicsteering column, if your vehicle hasthis feature, to automatically moveto the current driver's exit positionwhen one of the following occurs:. The vehicle is turned off or in

Retained Accessory Power(RAP) or accessory mode andthe driver door is opened.

. The vehicle is turned off or inRAP and the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter is pressed.

In order for the Auto Exit Recallfeature to work on an automatictransmission vehicle, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). On a manualtransmission vehicle, the parkingbrake must be set.

Press the OPTION button untilAUTO EXIT RECALL appears onthe display, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the followingmodes:. YES. NO (default)

If you choose YES, when you turnthe ignition off and open the driverdoor or press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter, the seat andthe telescopic steering wheel, if yourvehicle has this feature, will returnto their stored exit positions for aneasy exit or an easy entrance whenreturning to the vehicle.

The seat and steering wheel willonly return to the stored drivingposition if you press the appropriatememory button or activate the AutoMemory Recall feature.



Approach Lights: This optionbriefly turns on the parking lamps,the high-beam headlamps, and theback-up lamps during low lightperiods when the RKE transmitter isused to unlock the vehicle.

Press the OPTION button untilAPPROACH LIGHTS appears onthe display, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the followingmodes:. OFF. ON (default)

If you choose OFF, this option willturn off.



If you choose ON, the parkinglamps, the high-beam headlamps,and the back-up lamps will come onfor 20 seconds during low lightperiods when all of the followingoccur:. You press the unlock button on

the RKE transmitter.. Both of the doors are closed.. The vehicle is off or in RAP.

The lamps remain on for 20 secondsor until a door is opened, the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter ispressed, or the vehicle is no longeroff or in RAP.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2‑2 for moreinformation.


Twilight Delay: This option allowsyou to set the amount of time youwant the parking lamps andhigh-beam headlamps to remain on

after you exit the vehicle. This willoccur when the vehicle is off or inRAP and the headlamps are on dueto the automatic headlamp system.The parking lamps and high-beamheadlamps will remain on until thedriver selected time expires, theexterior lamp control is activated,or the vehicle is no longer off orin RAP.

Press the OPTION button untilTWILIGHT DELAY appears on thedisplay, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the followingmodes:. OFF. 15 S. 30 S (default). 90 S


If you choose 15 S, the twilightdelay time will be set to 15 seconds.




Flash at Unlock: This optionactivates the front and rear turnsignals for two short flashes whenthe unlock or hatch/trunk button onthe RKE transmitter is pressed. Thiswill only occur when the vehicleis off.

Press the OPTION button untilFLASH AT UNLOCK appears on thedisplay, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the followingmodes:. YES (default). NO

If you choose YES, the front andrear turn signals will flash twicewhen you press the unlock button orthe hatch/trunk button on the RKEtransmitter.





Flash at Lock: This optionactivates the front and rear turnsignals for one long flash when thelock button on the RKE transmitteris pressed. This will only occurwhen the vehicle is off. If the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter ispressed again within five seconds,the horn will sound regardless ofwhich setting you have selected.

Press the OPTION button untilFLASH AT LOCK appears on thedisplay, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the followingmodes:. YES (default). NO

If you choose YES, the front andrear turn signals will flash oncewhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.



FOB Reminder: This optionsounds the horn three times whenthe driver door is closed and there isa RKE transmitter inside the interiorof the vehicle. This will only occurwhen the vehicle is off.

Press the OPTION button until FOBREMINDER appears on the display,then press the RESET button toscroll through the following modes:. YES. NO (default)

If you choose YES, the horn willsound three times when a RKEtransmitter is inside of the vehiclewhile the ignition is turned off andthe driver door is closed.



Passive Door Locking: Thisoption allows you to select whetherthe doors automatically lock duringnormal vehicle exit. When theignition is turned off and all doorsbecome closed, the vehicle willdetermine how many RKEtransmitters remain in the vehicleinterior. If at least one RKEtransmitter has been removed fromthe interior of the vehicle, the doorswill lock after a short delay.

For example, if there are two RKEtransmitters in the vehicle and oneis removed, the other will be lockedin. The RKE transmitter locked in



the vehicle can still be used to startthe vehicle or unlock the doors,if needed. A person approaching theoutside of the locked vehicle withoutan authorized RKE transmitter,however, will not be able to openthe door, even with a transmitter inthe vehicle.

You may temporarily disable thepassive door locking feature bypressing the door unlock switch forthree seconds on an open door.Passive door locking will thenremain disabled until a door lockswitch is pressed or until the powermode transitions from the offpower mode.

Press the OPTION button untilPASSIVE DOOR LOCKING appearson the display, then press theRESET button to scroll through thefollowing modes:. OFF (default). SILENT. HORN


If you choose SILENT, the doors willautomatically lock a short time afteryou remove a RKE transmitter fromthe interior of the vehicle and closeboth doors.

If you choose HORN, the doors willautomatically lock and the horn willsound a short time after you removea RKE transmitter from the interiorof the vehicle and close both doors.

If you are parking in a quiet areaand do not want the horn to soundwhen the doors lock, press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitterimmediately after removing it fromthe interior and closing the doors.This will lock the doors and cancelthe passive locking for this ignitioncycle.


Passive Door Unlock: This optionallows you to select which doors willautomatically unlock when youapproach and open the driver doorwith the RKE transmitter. See DoorLocks on page 2‑7 for moreinformation.

Press the OPTION button untilPASSIVE DOOR UNLOCK appearson the display, then press theRESET button to scroll through thefollowing modes:. DRIVER. BOTH (default)

If you choose DRIVER, only thedriver door will automatically unlockwhen you approach and open thedriver door with the RKE transmitter.

If you choose BOTH, both doors willautomatically unlock when youapproach and open the driver doorwith the RKE transmitter.



Auto Unlock: This option allowsyou to select whether the driverdoor, both doors, or neither doorautomatically unlocks when the shiftlever is moved into P (Park) forautomatic transmission vehicles orwhen the ignition is turned off or isin RAP for manual transmissionvehicles.

Press the OPTION button untilAUTO UNLOCK appears on thedisplay, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the followingmodes:. OFF. DRIVER. BOTH (default)


If you choose DRIVER, onautomatic transmission vehicles, thedriver door will automatically unlockwhen the shift lever is moved intoP (Park). On manual transmission

vehicles, the driver door willautomatically unlock when theignition is turned off or is in RAP.

If you choose BOTH, on automatictransmission vehicles, both doorswill automatically unlock when theshift lever is moved into P (Park).On manual transmission vehicles,both doors will automatically unlockwhen the ignition is turned off or isin RAP.


Language: This option allows youto select the language the DIC, theHead-Up Display (HUD), if yourvehicle has this feature, and theradio uses to display messages.Each language mode will bedisplayed in its own language. Forexample, English will be displayedas ENGLISH, Spanish asESPANOL, etc. If your vehicle hasthe navigation system, you will nothave the Japanese language mode.

Press the OPTION button untilLANGUAGE appears on the display,then press the RESET button toscroll through the following modes:. ENGLISH (default). DEUTSCH (German). FRANCAIS (French). ITALIANO (Italian). ESPANOL (Spanish). JAPANESE

If you choose a language that youdo not understand, press theOPTION and RESET buttons forfive seconds. The DIC will begindisplaying all of the variouslanguages one by one for as longas the buttons are pressed. Whenthe desired language is displayed,release the buttons and the DIC willset to this language.




Personalize Name: This optionallows you to type in a name orgreeting that will appear on the DICdisplay whenever the correspondingRKE transmitter (1 or 2) is used orone of the memory buttons (1 or 2)located on the driver door ispressed.

Press the OPTION button untilPERSONALIZE NAME appears onthe display, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the followingmodes:. YES. NO (default)

If you choose YES, you can type ina name that will appear on the DICdisplay.

To program a name, use thefollowing procedure:

1. Enter the PERSONAL OPTIONSmenu and select the drivernumber (1 or 2) that you wouldlike to program by following the

instructions listed previouslyunder “Entering the PersonalOptions Menu”.

2. Press the OPTION button untilthe PERSONALIZE NAMEoption appears on the display.

3. Select YES underPERSONALIZE NAME bypressing the RESET button.

4. Press the OPTION button and acursor will display where youcan insert a letter.

5. Press the OPTION button againuntil the letter you want isdisplayed. To scroll through theletters faster and without abeeping noise, keep theOPTIONS button depressed.There are alpha/numericcharacters and a blank spaceavailable.

6. Press the RESET button toselect the letter of your choiceand proceed on to the nextspace to the right.

If you make a mistake and wouldlike to clear or replace a letter,perform the following steps:

6.1. Press the RESET button toreach the letter you wouldlike to change.

6.2. Press the OPTION buttonto scroll through the letterchoices.

6.3. Press the RESET button toselect the letter andproceed on to the nextspace to the right.

7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until thename or greeting you want iscomplete. After the name orgreeting is complete, keeppressing the RESET button untilthe display turns blank and exitsout of this option. You canprogram up to 20 characters.




If a customized name or greeting isnot programmed, the DIC displaywill show Driver 1 or Driver 2 tocorrespond with either the numberon the back of the RKEtransmitter (1 or 2) being used or tothe memory button (1 or 2) that ispressed.

PERSONALIZE NAME is the lastoption available to program in thePERSONAL OPTIONS menu.Pressing the OPTION button afterthis setting will exit you from thePERSONAL OPTIONS menu. Thelast item you were in prior toentering PERSONAL OPTIONS willthen display on the DIC.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

The FCC Grant of EquipmentAuthorization Certificate number isKOBGTE12C.

The Canadian Registration IDnumber is 3521A-GTE12C.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use this system with anygarage door opener that does nothave the stop and reverse feature.This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.



Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to haveanother person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remotecontrol transmitter for use in othervehicles, as well as for futureprogramming. Only the originalremote control transmitter is neededfor Fixed Code programming. Theprogrammed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons” inthis section.

Park the vehicle outside of thegarage when programming a garagedoor. Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage dooror gate being programmed.

Programming Universal HomeRemote—Rolling Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldafter 1996 are Rolling Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Press START or put the vehiclein accessory mode. See IgnitionPositions on page 9‑18 foradditional information.

Programming can only occurwhen the vehicle is running or inaccessory mode.

2. From inside the vehicle, pressthe two outside buttons at thesame time for one totwo seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.



3. Locate in the garage, the garagedoor opener receiver(motor-head unit). Locate the“Learn” or “Smart” button. It canusually be found where thehanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unitand may be a colored button.Press this button. After pressingthis button, complete thefollowing steps in less than30 seconds.

4. Immediately return to thevehicle. Press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonthat will be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator light,above the selected button,

should slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to20 seconds.

5. Immediately, within one second,release the button when thegarage door moves. Theindicator light blinks rapidly untilprogramming is complete.

6. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Rolling Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1 through 6, choosing adifferent function button in Step 4than what was used for the garagedoor opener.

If these instructions do not work, thegarage door opener is probably aFixed Code unit. Follow theprogramming instructions that followfor a Fixed Code garage dooropener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote— Fixed Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldbefore 1996 are Fixed Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Press START or put the vehiclein accessory mode. See IgnitionPositions on page 9‑18 foradditional information.

Programming can only occurwhen the vehicle is running or inaccessory mode.



2. To verify that the garage dooropener is a Fixed Code unit,remove the battery cover on thehand-held transmitter suppliedby the manufacturer of thegarage door opener motor.If there is a row of dip switchessimilar to the graphic above, thegarage door opener is a FixedCode unit. If you do not see arow of dip switches, return to theprevious section, “ProgrammingUniversal HomeRemote –Rolling Code.”

The hand-held transmitter canhave between eight and12 dip switches depending onthe brand of transmitter.

The garage door opener receiver(motor head unit) could alsohave a row of dip switches thatcan be used when programmingthe Universal Home Remote.If the total number of switcheson the motor head andhand-held transmitter is different,or if the dip switch settings aredifferent, use the dip switchsettings on the motor head unitto program the Universal HomeRemote. The motor head dipswitch settings can also be usedwhen the original hand-heldtransmitter is not available.

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Two Positions

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Three Positions

The panel of switches might notappear exactly as they do in theexamples above, but theyshould be similar.

The switch positions on thehand-held transmitter could belabeled as follows:. A switch in the up position

could be labeled as “Up,”“+,” or “On.”



. A switch in the downposition could be labeled as“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

. A switch in the middleposition could be labeled as“Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

3. Write down the eight to 12 switchsettings from left to right asfollows:. When a switch is in the up

position, write “Left.”. When a switch is in the

down position, write “Right.”. If a switch is set between

the up and down position,write “Middle.”

The switch settings writtendown in Step 3 nowbecome the button strokesto be entered into theUniversal Home Remote inStep 5. Be sure to enter theswitch settings written downin Step 3, in order from left

to right, into the UniversalHome Remote, whencompleting Step 5.

4. From inside the vehicle, firstfirmly press all three buttons atthe same time for aboutthree seconds. Release thebuttons to put the UniversalHome Remote intoprogramming mode.

A. Left Button (Up, +, or On)

B. Middle Button (Middle, 0,or Neutral)

C. Right Button (Down, -, or Off)

5. The indicator lights blink slowly.Enter each switch setting fromStep 3 into the vehicle'sUniversal Home Remote. Youhave two and one-half minutes tocomplete Step 5. Now press onebutton on the Universal HomeRemote for each switch settingas follows:. If you wrote “Left,” press

the left button (A) in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Right,” pressthe right button (C) in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Middle,” pressthe middle button (B) in thevehicle.

6. After entering all of the switchpositions, again, firmly press andrelease all three buttons at thesame time. The indicator lightsturn on.



7. Press and hold the button thatwill be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator lightabove the selected buttonshould slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to55 seconds.

8. Immediately release the buttonwhen the garage door moves.The indicator light blinks rapidlyuntil programming is complete.

9. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Fixed Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1 through 9, choosing adifferent button in Step 7 than whatwas used for the garage dooropener.

Universal Remote SystemOperationPress and hold the appropriatebutton for at least one-half second.The indicator light comes on whilethe signal is being transmitted.

Operation can occur:. If the vehicle is in

accessory mode.. If the vehicle is running.. If the vehicle is in Retained

Accessory Mode (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑21 for moreinformation.

. Up to an additional 10 minutesafter RAP finishes.

. Up to 10 minutes after any dooris opened.

Reprogramming UniversalHome Remote Buttons

Any of the three buttons can bereprogrammed by repeating theinstructions.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons

The programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase either Rolling Code orFixed Code on the Universal HomeRemote device:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons at the same time forapproximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, locateddirectly above the buttons, beginto blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin toblink, release both buttons. Thecodes from all buttons areerased.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑5 or Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesEntry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is locatedto the left of the steering wheel onthe multifunction lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turnthe band with this symbol on it tooperate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp band has fourpositions:

O (Off): Turns off all lamps.

AUTO (Automatic): Sets theexterior lamps to automatic mode.AUTO mode turns the exteriorlamps on and off depending on howmuch light is available outside thevehicle.

To override AUTO mode, turn thecontrol to off.

To reset to AUTO mode, turn thecontrol to exterior lamps and thenback to AUTO. Automatic mode alsoresets when the vehicle is turned offand then back on again if the controlis left in the AUTO position.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

The parking brake indicator lightcomes on and stays on when theparking lamps are on with theengine off and the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.


6-2 Lighting

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime will sound if theexterior lamp control is left on ineither the headlamp or parking lampposition and the driver door isopened with the ignition off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from lowbeam to high, push the turn signallever all the way forward. To changefrom high to low beam, pull the leverrearward.

While the high beams are on, thislight on the instrument cluster willalso be lit.

Flash-to-PassTo use the flash-to-pass feature,briefly pull the turn signal levertoward you. The high-beamindicator flashes to indicate to theother driver that you intend to pass.If the low-beam headlamps are offand the fog lamps are on, the foglamps flash.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes the frontturn signal lamps come on when thefollowing conditions are met:. It is still daylight and the ignition

is on.. The exterior lamp control is in

the AUTO position.

. The transmission is not inP (Park) or the parking brakeis off.

. The parking brake is off or thevehicle speed is greater than13 km/h (8 mph).

When DRL are on, only the frontturn signal lamps will be on. Theparking lamps, taillamps, instrumentpanel lights, or other exterior lampswill not be on when the DRL arebeing used.

When it is dark enough outside, thefront turn signal lamps turn off andthe normal low-beam headlampsturn on.

When it is bright enough outside,the regular lamps go off, and thefront turn signal lamps will take over.If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately one minutefor the automatic headlamp systemto change to DRL if it is lightoutside. During that delay, the


Lighting 6-3

instrument panel cluster may not beas bright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness knob isin the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑6 for moreinformation.

If it is dark enough outside and theexterior lamp control is off, aHEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDmessage will display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See LampMessages on page 5‑42.

Turning the exterior lamp control tooff a second time, or turning on theheadlamps will remove theHEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDmessage in the DIC. If the parkinglamps or the fog lamps were turnedon instead, the HEADLAMPSSUGGESTED message willcontinue to be displayed.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to the off position orshift into P (Park). The DRL will stay

off until the control is toggled againor the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

This procedure applies only tovehicles first sold in the UnitedStates.

Twilight SentinelTwilight Sentinel® is an automaticheadlamp system. When activated,this feature turns your headlampsand parking lamps on and off bysensing how dark it is outside.

Be sure not to cover the light sensoron the top of the instrument panel.

AUTO: Activates the system.

If the band is already in the AUTOposition when you start your vehicle,Twilight Sentinel is automaticallyenabled.

If it is dark outside, your vehicleheadlamps and parking lamps willturn on automatically.

Once it is bright enough outside, theheadlamps and parking lamps willautomatically turn back off.

Twilight Sentinel may also turn onwhen you drive through a dimlylit area.

Once you leave the dimly lit area, itmay take about one minute beforethe Twilight Sentinel turns off.During this brief delay, theinstrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel dimmer is set tofull brightness. See InstrumentPanel Illumination Control onpage 6‑6.

To temporarily disable TwilightSentinel, turn the band to O.


6-4 Lighting

To turn Twilight Sentinel back on,turn the band to O again, thenrelease it.

If the Twilight Sentinel has theheadlamps turned on and you turnthe ignition off, the headlamps willstay on for a period of time whileyou leave the vehicle.

Use the Driver Information Center toturn Twilight Sentinel on or off andto increase or decrease the lengthof the delayed illumination period.See “Personal Options” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑51.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers are

not operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning flashers warnothers that you have a problem. Thebutton is near the center of theinstrument panel.

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.Press again to turn the flashers off.

The hazard warning flashers workno matter what mode the ignition isin, even if the ignition is turned off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Release the lever and the


Lighting 6-5

turn signal automatically flashesthree times. If more flashes aredesired, continue to hold the lever.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb maybe burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10‑45.

Turn Signal on Chime

A chime sounds if the turn signalhas been on for more than 1.2 km(0.75 miles) of driving.

If you need to leave the turn signalon for more than 1.2 km(0.75 miles), turn off the signal andthen turn it back on.

Fog Lamps

Use fog lamps for better vision infoggy or misty conditions.

The fog lamps control is located onthe multifunction lever next to theexterior lamp control.

# (Fog Lamps): Turning the bandto this position will turn the foglamps on.

When you turn the fog lamps on, thefog lamp light will appear on theinstrument panel cluster to indicatethat the fog lamps and the parkinglamps are on.

If you turn the high-beamheadlamps on, the fog lamps willturn off. They will turn on againwhen you switch to low-beamheadlamps.

The ignition must be on for the foglamps to operate.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.


6-6 Lighting

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The knob for this feature is locatedon the left side of the instrumentpanel.

Push the knob in to turn on theinterior lights.

Turn and hold the knob clockwise tobrighten the lights orcounterclockwise to dim them.During the day, this knob will adjustthe instrument panel brightness andat night will adjust all interiorlighting.

Be sure not to have this knob turnedall the way down with the lamps onduring the day. The DriverInformation Center (DIC) may not bevisible.

Courtesy LampsWhen any door or the hatch/trunk lidis opened, the interior lamps will goon unless it is bright outside.

You can also turn the courtesylamps on and off by pressing theinstrument panel brightness knob.

Reading LampsThe inside rearview mirror includestwo reading lamps. The lamps willgo on when a door is opened. Whenthe doors are closed, press eachlamp switch to turn them onindividually.

Lighting Features

Entry/Exit LightingWith entry lighting, the interiorlamps will come on when enteringthe vehicle. To illuminate your exit,the interior lamps come on for about20 seconds when the engine isturned off.

To turn the entry and exit lighting off,quickly turn the courtesy lamps onand off by pressing the instrumentpanel brightness knob.


Lighting 6-7

Battery Power ProtectionThis vehicle has a feature to helpprevent the battery from beingdrained in case any of the followinglamps are left on: the underhoodlamp, if your vehicle has thisfeature, vanity mirror lamps, cargolamps, reading lamps, centerconsole, or glove box lamps. If anyof these lamps are left on, they willautomatically time-out after about10 minutes. To reset it, all of theabove lamps must be turned off orthe ignition key on.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverIf the manual parking lamps orheadlamps have been left on, theexterior lamps will turn off as soonas the ignition is turned off orRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. This protects againstdraining the battery in case youhave accidentally left the headlampsor parking lamps on. The battery

saver does not work if theheadlamps are turned on after theignition switch is turned to off.

If you need to leave the lamps on,use the exterior lamp control to turnthe lamps back on.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Diversity Antenna System . . . 7-12Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-12

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Introduction

InfotainmentDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑21 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the navigation manual.


7-2 Infotainment System

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate andLOCKED displays if the radio isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

When the when the ignition is in theoff position, a blinking red light onthe upper left side of the radioindicates that TheftLock is armed.

Overview

A. t SEEK/SCANu

. Radio: Presst oru toseek the previous or nextstation. Press and hold toru to scan through thestrongest stations.

. CD: Presst oru to go tothe previous or next track.Press and holdt oru togo fast backward or fastforward within a track.



B. Power/Volume Knob. Press to turn the system

on or off.. Turn to adjust the volume.

C. Buttons 1−6. Press to recall a favorite

station.. Press and hold to save the

current station.

D. CD Slot

E. {. Radio: Press to seek the

previous station. Press andhold to scan backwardthrough the strongeststations.

. CD: Press to go to theprevious track. Press andhold to go fast backwardwithin a track.

F. |. Radio: Press to seek the

next station. Press andhold to scan forwardthrough the strongeststations.

. CD: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold tofast forward within a track.

G. RDM (Random). Press to play the CD

tracks in random order.

H. RPT (Repeat). Press to repeat the current

CD track.

I. X (Song List)

. The Song List feature cansave 20 track selections.

J. MUTE. Press to mute and unmute

the system.

K. X (Eject)

. Press to eject the CD.

L. Auxiliary Port. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Auxiliary

Input Jack.

M. O / e (Tune/Tone Menu)

. Press to open the ToneSettings menu.

. Turn to manually find astation.

N. BAND. Press to scroll through the

available bands AM, FM,or XM if equipped.

O. CD/AUX. Press to listen to a CD or

an auxiliary source.

P. V (Information)

. Press to displayinformation on the currentstation or track.

Q. CAT (Category). Press to display a list of

XM categories.



R. TRAF (Traffic). Press to find a station with

traffic information. SeeAM-FM Radio on page 7‑6.

S. AUTO EQ (Auto Equalizer). Press to customize the EQ.

See Operation onpage 7‑4.

T. AUTO3 (Auto Volume)

. Press to set the automaticvolume to adjust for roadand wind noise. SeeOperation on page 7‑4.

OperationAn indicator light on the upper leftside of the radio flashes when theignition is off, to indicate thetheft-deterrent feature is set. SeeTheft-Deterrent Feature onpage 7‑2.

Playing the Radio

Power/Volume Knob: Press toturn the system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

MUTE: Press to silence thesystem. Press again to turn thesound on.

This button is not available on theSix-Disc CD Radio.

V (Information): Press until thedesired display is shown, then holdfor two seconds until the radiobeeps once to change the defaultdisplay. The selected display is nowthe default.

For RDS:

Press V to change the display. Thedisplay options are station name,RDS station frequency, PTY, andthe name of the program (ifavailable).

Audio Settings

Press and holdO / e when notone or speaker control is displayedto adjust all tone and speakercontrols to the middle position.AUDIO SETTINGS CENTEREDdisplays.

Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

O / e (Bass/Treble): To adjustthe bass or treble:

Press and releaseO / e untilBASS or TREBLE displays.

. Turn theO / e knob toincrease or to decrease thelevel.

. Press and hold theO / e knobuntil the level changes to themiddle position.



Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

O / e (Balance/Fade): To adjustthe balance:

Press and releaseO / e untilBALANCE displays.

. Turn theO / e knob to movethe sound toward the right or theleft speakers.


To adjust the fade:

Press and releaseO / e untilFADE displays

. Turn theO / e knob to movethe sound toward the front or therear speakers.


AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): The radio savesseparate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.

For vehicles without the Bose®

sound system:. Press AUTO EQ to select

equalization settings designedfor CLASSICAL, POP, ROCK,JAZZ, TALK, and COUNTRY.

. Select CUSTOM or change bassor treble to return the EQ to themanual bass and treble settings.

For vehicles with the Bose soundsystem:. Press AUTO EQ to select

equalization settings from EQ1through EQ6.

. Select CUSTOM or change bassor treble to return the EQ to themanual bass and treble settings.

AUTOn (Automatic Volume):Automatic volume automaticallyadjusts the audio system to makeup for road and wind noise, byincreasing the volume as vehiclespeed increases.

For vehicles without the Bose soundsystem:

1. Set the volume at the desiredlevel.

2. Press AUTOn to selectAUTO VOLUME MIN (minimum),AUTO VOLUME MED (medium),or AUTO VOLUME MAX(maximum). Each higher settingprovides more volumecompensation at faster vehiclespeeds.

3. Press AUTOn until AUTOVOLUME OFF displays to turnautomatic volume off.



For vehicles with the Bose soundsystem:

Vehicles with the Bose soundsystem include Bose AudioPilot®

noise compensation technology.AudioPilot continuously adjusts theaudio system equalization tocompensate for background noise.This feature is most effective atlower radio volume settings wherebackground noise can affect howwell the audio is heard. At highervolume settings, there may be littleor no adjustments by AudioPilot. Foradditional information on AudioPilot,visit bose.com/audiopilot.

To use AudioPilot:

1. Set the volume at the desiredlevel.

2. Press AUTOn until AUTOVOLUME ON displays.

3. Press AUTOn until AUTOVOLUME OFF displays to turnoff AudioPilot.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error):Displays if the radio is no longerconfigured properly for the vehicle.The vehicle must be returned toyour dealer for service.

LOC (Locked): Displays when theTheftLock system has locked up.The vehicle must be returned toyour dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly orcannot be corrected, contact yourdealer.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

RDS features are available for useonly on FM stations that broadcastRDS information. The station nameor call letters display while the radiois tuned to an RDS station.

This system relies upon receivingspecific information from thesestations and works only when theinformation is available. In rarecases, a radio station can broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

With RDS, the radio can:. Seek to stations broadcasting

the selected type ofprogramming.

. Receive announcementsconcerning local and nationalemergencies.



. Display messages from radiostations.

. Seek to stations with trafficannouncements.

. Provide the time of day.

. Provide a program type (PTY)for current programming.

. Provide the name of the programbeing broadcast.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local ornational emergencies. When analert announcement comes on thecurrent radio station, ALERT!displays. The announcement isheard, even if the volume is low or aCD is playing. If a CD is playing,play stops during theannouncement. Alertannouncements cannot beturned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests ofthe emergency broadcast system.This feature is not supported by allRDS stations.

V (Information): If the currentstation has a message, INFOdisplays. Press V to see themessage. The message can displaythe artist, song title, call in phonenumbers, etc.

If the entire message is notdisplayed, parts of the messageappears every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, pressand release V. A new group of wordsdisplays after every press of thebutton. Once the complete messagehas displayed, INFO disappearsfrom the display until another newmessage is received. The lastmessage can be displayed bypressing this button. The lastmessage is displayed until a newmessage is received or the radio istuned to a different station.

NO INFO displays when a messageis not available from a station.

TRAF (Traffic): TA (traffic) displayswhen the station broadcasts trafficannouncements.

Press TRAF and the radio seeks toa station that broadcasts trafficannouncements. When a station isfound, the radio stops seeking andTA displays. NO TRAFFIC INFOdisplays if a station that broadcaststraffic announcements cannot befound.

Press TRAF to turn off the trafficannouncements if TA is on thedisplay.

The radio plays the trafficannouncement even if the volume islow. The radio interrupts the play ofa CD if the last tuned stationbroadcasts traffic announcements.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, or AM.

O / e (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

t SEEKu : Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there.



The radio only stops at stations witha strong signal.

t SCANu : Press and holdt oru for two seconds untilFREQUENCY SCAN displays. Theradio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes on to thenext station. Press t oru again tostop scanning.

To scan preset stations:

Press and holdt oru forfour seconds until PRESET SCANdisplays. The radio goes to the nextpreset station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextpreset station. Presst oru againor press one of the pushbuttons tostop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with astrong signal.

1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Pressto play stations that areprogrammed to the radio presetpushbuttons.

Storing Radio Stations

Drivers are encouraged to storeradio station while the vehicle isparked. See Defensive Driving onpage 9‑3. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,six AM, six M1, and six XM2), andequalization settings for eachstation can be programmed on thesix numbered pushbuttons.To setpresets:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1,FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.




Satellite Radio

SiriusXM™ Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM service. If SiriusXMService needs to be reactivated, theradio will display "No SubscriptionPlease Renew" on channel XM1.For more information, contactSiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., andwww.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Finding an SiriusXM Channel

BAND: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2.

O / e (Tune): Turn to manuallyselect an XM channel.



t SEEKu : Press to go to theprevious or to the next XM channel.

t SCANu : Press and holdt oru for two seconds untilFREQUENCY SCAN displays. Theradio goes to a channel, plays for afew seconds, then goes on to thenext station. Press t oru again tostop scanning.

To scan preset stations:

Press and holdt oru forfour seconds until PRESET SCANdisplays. The radio goes to the nextpreset station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextpreset station. Presst oru againor press one of the pushbuttons tostop scanning presets.

1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Pressto play channels that areprogrammed to the radio presetpushbuttons.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

To select an SiriusXM station bycategory:

1. Press the CAT button. The lastselected category displays.

2. Turn theO / e knob to selecta category.

3. Presst oru to go to acategory's station. SEEKINGCATEGORY displays.

4. To go to another station withinthat category, press the CATbutton to display the category,then presst oru to go toanother station.

If the radio cannot find the desiredcategory, NONE displays and theradio returns to the last stationtuned.

SCAN: To scan the stations withina category:

1. Press CAT. The last selectedcategory displays.

2. Turn theO / e knob to selecta category.

3. Press and hold t oru until abeep sounds and SCANCATEGORY displays. The radiobegins scanning the stations inthe category.

4. Presst oru to stop scanning.

Storing SiriusXM Channels

Drivers are encouraged to store XMchannels while the vehicle isparked. See Defensive Driving onpage 9‑3. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.



Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2),and equalization settings for eachstation can be programmed on thesix numbered pushbuttons.

To set presets:

1. Tune to a channel.




SiriusXM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by calling1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Updating: The encryption code inthe receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

CH Off Air: This channel is notcurrently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

CH Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour SiriusXM Subscriptionpackage.

CH Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

No Info: No artist, song title,category, or text information isavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Subscription Please Renew:SiriusXM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact SiriusXM atwww.siriusxm.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Not Found: There are no channelsavailable for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked: The SiriusXM receiverin the vehicle may have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, SiriusXM receiverscannot be swapped betweenvehicles. If this message is receivedafter having the vehicle serviced,check with your dealer.



Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, thismessage will alternate with theSiriusXM Radio eight-digit radio IDlabel. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there may be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Chk XMRcvr: If this message doesnot clear within a short period oftime, the receiver may have a fault.Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Althoughthe radio has a built-in electroniccircuit that automatically works toreduce interference, some static canoccur, especially around tallbuildings or hills, causing the soundto fade in and out.

SiriusXM® Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast to coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the SiriusXM signal for a periodof time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.



Diversity Antenna SystemThe AM-FM antenna is a hiddenself-tuning system. It optimizes theAM and FM signals relative to thevehicle's position and radio stationsource. No maintenance oradjustments are needed.

Satellite Radio AntennaFor vehicles with XM Satellite RadioService, the antenna is located onthe roof or on the trunk lid of thevehicle. Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

Audio Players

CD Player

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a CD; it couldget caught in the CD player. Use amarking pen to write on the top ofthe CD if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners; theycould damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

Store CDs in their original cases orother protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight and dust. TheCD player scans the bottom of thedisc. If the bottom of a CD isdamaged it may not play properly orat all. Do not touch the bottom of aCD while handling it. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is dirty, take asoft, lint-free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Using the CD Player

The CD player can play smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring.



A CD in the player stays in theplayer when the ignition is turnedoff. When the ignition or radio isturned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

Loading a CD

Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up, until the player pullsthe CD in. The CD begins playingautomatically.

The CD symbol displays when a CDis inserted, and the track numberdisplays when each new track startsto play.

M (Load): Press to load a CD intothe CD player.

To insert a CD:

1. Press M.

2. Load a CD and insert the CDpartway into the slot, label sideup when INSERT CD displays.The player pulls the CD in.

Playing a CD

O / e (Tune): Turn to go to thenext or previous track.

{ (Reverse): Press and hold toreverse within the current track.

| (Fast Forward): Press and holdto fast forward through the currenttrack.

t SEEKu : Press the left arrowto go to the start of the current trackif more than eight seconds haveplayed. Press the right arrow to goto the start of the next track. If eitherarrow is held or pressed more thanonce, the player continues movingbackward or forward throughthe CD.

t SCANu : To scan one CD,press and hold either arrow for morethan two seconds until SCANdisplays and a beep sounds. Theradio goes to the next track, playsfor 10 seconds, then goes to thenext track. Press either arrow againto stop scanning.

AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press to select theequalization setting while playing aCD. The equalization is stored whena CD is played. For moreinformation on AUTO EQ, see“AUTO EQ” previously in thissection.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactiveCD remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to playa CD when listening to the radio.CD displays when a CD is in theplayer. If your system has a remoteplayback device, pressing thisbutton a second time allows theremote device to play.

X (Eject): Press to eject a CDfrom the CD Radio.

RPT (Repeat): Press to hear atrack or an entire CD over again.



Single CD Radio:

Press RPT to hear a track overagain; REPEAT displays. Pressagain to turn off repeat; REPEATOFF displays.

RDM (Random): Press to hear thetracks in random, rather thansequential order.

CD Radio:

Press and release RDM untilRANDOM DISC PLAY displays.Press and release RDM untilRANDOM OFF displays to turn offrandom play.

R (Song List): The Song Listfeature can save 20 track selections.

To save tracks:

1. If S-LIST is displayed, pressRto turn it off.

2. Select the desired CD bypressing the numberedpushbutton and then useu orO / e knob to select the trackto be saved.

3. Press and holdR until a beepsounds and ADDED SONGdisplays.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to saveother selections.

SONGLIST FULL displays if morethan 20 selections are stored.

To play tracks:

1. PressR. One beep sounds andS-LIST displays. The recordedtracks begin to play in the orderthey were saved.

2. Presst oru to go back orforward within the saved tracks.

To delete tracks:

1. PressR to turn song list on.S-LIST displays.

2. Presst oru , and use theO/ e knob to select the desiredtrack to be deleted.

3. Press and holdR until SONGREMOVED displays.

After a track has been deleted, theremaining tracks are moved up thelist. When another track is added tothe song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

To delete the entire song list:

1. PressR to turn song list on.S-LIST displays.

2. Press and holdR for more thanfour seconds. One beep soundsand SONGLIST EMPTY displaysto confirm that the song list hasbeen deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song listcontains saved tracks from that CD,those tracks are automaticallydeleted from the song list. Anytracks saved to the song list againare added to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, pressR.One beep sounds and S-LIST isremoved from the display.



MP3 Format

Radios with the MP3 feature canonly play CD-R discs. Do not mixstandard audio and MP3 files on thesame disc.

Supported File Structure

Radios with the MP3 feature supportup to:. 50 folders. 11 folders in depth. 50 playlists. 255 files. 10 sessions

Root Directory:

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory display as F1 ROOT.

Empty Folder:

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Supported Bit Rates

The following bit rates aresupported: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps,192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and320 kbps or a variable bit rate.

File Naming

ID3v1 and ID3v2 tags aresupported. The track namecontained in the ID3 tag is shownon the display. The display onlyshows up to 32 characters for trackand file names.

If the track name is not contained inthe ID3 tag, the display shows thefile name without the file extension.

Playlists

Playlists that do not have a .m3u or.wpl extension may not work.

Preprogrammed playlists created byWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or RealJukebox™ software are supportedand cannot be edited using theradio.

Playing an MP3

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it in,and READING displays. The CDshould begin playing and the CDsymbol displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD-R in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD-R startsto play where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.



Order of Play

Tracks are played sequentially inthe following order:

1. Playlists.

2. Files contained in the rootdirectory.

3. Files contained in folders.

O / e (Tune): Turn to go to thenext or previous track.

{ (Previous Folder): Press to goto the first track in the previousfolder. Press and hold to reversethrough the current track.

| (Next Folder): Press to go tothe first track in the next folder.Press and hold to fast forward thecurrent track.

RDM (Random): Press to hear thetracks in random, rather thansequential order.

Press and release RDM until:. RANDOM DISC PLAY displays

to play the tracks on the CD inrandom order.

. RANDOM FOLDER displays toplay the tracks in the folder inrandom order.

. RANDOM OFF displays to turnoff random play.

RPT (Repeat): Press to hear atrack, CD, or folder over again.

Press and release RPT until:. REPEAT displays to repeat a

track.. REPEAT ONE DISC displays to

repeat a CD.. REPEAT FOLDER displays to

repeat a folder.. REPEAT OFF displays to turn off

repeated play.

t SEEKu : Presst to go to thestart of the current track, if morethan eight seconds have played.Pressu to go to the next track.

Presst oru more than once tocontinue moving backward orforward through the CD.

V (Information): Press to displaythe artist name and album containedin the ID3 tag.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactiveCD remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to playa CD when listening to the radio.The CD symbol displays when a CDis loaded.



Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

The vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput jack on the right side of thefaceplate or in the center console.This is not an audio output; do notplug the headphone set into thefront auxiliary input jack. An externalaudio device can be connected tothe auxiliary input jack for use asanother source for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). See DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio’s front auxiliary input jackto use a portable audio player. Theradio displays AUX INPUT DEVICEwhen a device is connected andbegins playing audio from thatdevice.

Top Knob (Power/Volume): Turnto increase or decrease the volumeof the portable player. Additionalvolume adjustments can be madefrom the portable device.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD while a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player isconnected, AUX INPUT DEVICEdisplays. If a portable audio playeris not connected, AUX INPUTDEVICE does not display.

Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.



. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth-capable cell phone with aHands-Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.



b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

i (Phone On Hook): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if equipped. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as an MP3 player.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seethe cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN that was provided in Step 3.After the PIN is successfullyentered, the system prompts youto provide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.



6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.



Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.



Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency



3. Say “911.”


Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

For navigation radio press andhold for two seconds.

. Pressi to ignore a call.



Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressi to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressi to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g ,and then say “Un-mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.



Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.



Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS Inc. AllRights Reserved.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.

“Made for iPod” means that anelectronic accessory has beendesigned to connect specifically toiPod and has been certified by thedeveloper to meet Appleperformance standards.

iPod is a trademark of AppleComputer, Inc., registered in theU.S. and other countries.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemWith this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.

A. Driver Temperature Controls

B. Display

C. Passenger Temperature Control

D. AUTO

E. Recirculation

F. Air Conditioning

G. Fan Control

H. Air Delivery Mode Control

I. Defrost

J. Rear Window Defogger


8-2 Climate Controls

When the vehicle is first started, thedisplay shows the driver'stemperature setting, the outsidetemperature, the fan speed, and theair delivery, for about 10 seconds.

The outside temperature is shown inthe center of the display. The digitaldisplay will show the readings inFahrenheit or Celsius. See“Personal Options” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑51 forinformation on changing yourdisplay.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Press theAUTO button to place the entiresystem in the automatic mode.When automatic operation is active,the system automatically controlsthe inside temperature, the airdelivery mode, and the fan speed.

After a 10 second display of thecurrent settings, the word AUTO,the driver's temperature setting andthe outside temperature will beshown. The system operates toreach the set temperature as quickly

as possible. The AUTO controlsystem works best with the windowsup and the removable roof installedor the convertible top up.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the temperature to acomfortable setting between16°C (60°F) and 32°C (90°F).Choosing the coldest or warmesttemperature setting will notcause the system to heat or coolany faster. A setting of 23°C(73°F) is suggested.

In cold weather, the system willstart at reduced fan speeds toavoid blowing cold air into yourvehicle until warmer air isavailable. The system starts outblowing air at the floor but maychange modes automatically asthe vehicle warms up to maintainthe chosen temperature setting.The length of time needed forwarm up depends on the outsidetemperature and the length oftime that has elapsed since thevehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate.This may take from 10 to30 minutes. Then adjust thetemperature, if necessary.

Do not cover the solar sensorlocated in the center of theinstrument panel, near thewindshield. For more information onthe solar sensor, see “Sensors” laterin this section.

Manual Operation

Driver Power/Temperature: Pressthe driver temperature knob to turnthe climate control system off. Thisis the only setting that completelyshuts off the fan. The digital displayshows only the outside temperature.The driver and the passenger settemperature and the air intake modecan still be adjusted when theclimate control is off.

Passenger Power/Temperature:Press the passenger temperatureknob to turn the passenger's climatecontrol system on or off. Turn theknob to increase or decrease thetemperature for the passenger. If the



passenger's climate control systemis off, the driver's temperature knobwill control the temperature for theentire vehicle.

x9w (Fan): Press to increaseor decrease the fan speed. The fanspeed setting will appear in thedisplay.

Pressing the arrows will deleteAUTO from the digital display. Thefan graphics with the fan speed barswill be shown. The AUTO buttonmust be pressed to return to theautomatic fan control.

If the airflow seems low when thefan speed is at the highest setting,the passenger compartment air filtermay need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see PassengerCompartment Air Filter on page 8‑6.

N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press this button to manually lock inthe current air delivery setting andto stop the automatic mode control.PressingN deletes AUTO from thedigital display and the modegraphics will be shown. To change

the setting, pressN again. TheAUTO button must be pressed toreturn to the automatic modeselection.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets, with someair directed to the floor outlets.

% (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the windshield and side windowdefogger outlets.

- (Floor/Defog): This mode clearsthe windows of fog or moisture. Airis directed to the windshield and thefloor outlets, with a small amount tothe side window outlets. In thismode, the system automaticallyturns off the recirculation and runsthe air conditioning compressorunless the outside temperature is at

or below freezing. The recirculationmode cannot be selected while inthe defog mode.

1 (Defrost): This mode clears thewindows of fog or frost more quickly.Air is directed to the windshield, witha small amount directed to the sidewindow outlets. The indicator lightcomes on and the digital display willshow the defrost mode symbol andfan speed when the front defrostmode is being used. In this mode,the system automatically turns offthe recirculation and runs the airconditioning compressor, unless theoutside temperature is at or belowfreezing. Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defrost mode.Pressing1 again will return thesystem to the last operating mode.

For severe ice conditions, turn thedriver's temperature knob to 32°C(90°F) while in defrost mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.



^ (Air Conditioning Off): Press toturn the air conditioning compressoroff. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation. When inAUTO, the air conditioningcompressor comes on automatically,as needed.

Air conditioning does not operate attemperatures below about 2°C to4°C (35°F to 40°F). In temperaturesabove 4°C (40°F), the airconditioning cannot be turned off indefrost and defog, as it helps toremove moisture from the vehicle.It also helps to keep the windowsclear.

You may notice a slight change inengine performance when the airconditioning compressor shuts offand turns on again. This is normal.The system is designed to makeadjustments to help with fueleconomy while still maintaining theselected temperature.

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps to reduce the time

it takes for the vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot dayspress the AUTO button and adjustthe temperature to a cool,comfortable setting. To achievemaximum cool down, do thefollowing:

1. SelectH mode.

2. Press?.

3. Select the a/c on.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time may cause theair inside of your vehicle to becometoo dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in thevehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might drip

under the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

? (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat recirculation is on. This modeprevents outside air from enteringyour vehicle. It can be used toprevent outside air and odors fromentering your vehicle and to helpcool the air inside your vehicle morequickly. Recirculation mode is notavailable in defrost or defog mode.

Sensors

The solar sensor on the vehiclemonitors the solar heat and usesthe information to maintain theselected temperature whenoperating in AUTO mode byautomatically adjusting thetemperature, fan speed, and airdelivery system. The system mayalso supply cooler air to the side ofthe vehicle facing the sun. Therecirculation mode will also beactivated, as necessary. Do not



cover the solar sensor located onthe top of the instrument panel nearthe windshield or the system will notwork properly.

There is also a sensor locatedbehind the front bumper. Thissensor reads the outside airtemperature and helps to maintainthe temperature inside the vehicle.Any cover on the front of the vehiclecould give a false reading in thetemperature.

If the outside temperature goes up,the displayed temperature will notchange until:. The vehicle's speed is above

19 km/h (12 mph) forfive minutes.

. The vehicle's speed is above52 km/h (32 mph) for two andone‐half minutes.

These delays prevent falsereadings. If the temperature goesdown, the outside temperature willbe shown when you start thevehicle. If it has been turned off for

less than three hours, thetemperature will be recalled from theprevious vehicle operation.

There is also an inside temperaturesensor located to the left of theignition switch. The automaticclimate control system uses thissensor to receive information, so ifyou block or cover it, the system willnot function properly.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog or frostfrom the rear window.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the engine is running.

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. Be sure to clearas much snow from the rear windowas possible. An indicator lightcomes on to show that the rearwindow defogger is on.

The rear window defogger turns offabout 10 minutes after the button ispressed when traveling less than

48 km/h (30 mph). If turned onagain, the defogger only runs forabout five minutes before turningoff. The defogger can also be turnedoff by turning off the engine.

The vehicle has heated outsiderearview mirrors. The mirrors willheat to help clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirrors when therear window defogger button ispressed.

For vehicles with a powerconvertible top, the rear windowdefogger and heated mirrors areautomatically disabled when thepower convertible top is movingor down.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal, or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.



Air VentsUse the tab located on the airoutlets to change the direction of theairflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the area around the baseof the instrument panel consoleand air path under the seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside of the vehicle moreeffectively.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe passenger compartment airfilter removes certain particles fromthe air including pollen and dustparticles. Reductions in airflow,which may occur more often industy areas, indicate that the filtermay need to be replaced. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Notice: Driving without apassenger compartment air filterin place can cause water andsmall particles, like paper andleaves, to be pulled into yourclimate control system which maycause damage to it. Make sureyou always replace the old filterwith a new one.

The passenger compartment airfilter is located on the passengerside of the engine compartmentnear the battery. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑8.

To check or replace the air filter:

1. Remove the cover retainerclips (A) from the passengercompartment air filter cover.

2. Remove the cover.



3. Remove the filter and install thenew air filter.

4. Replace the filter cover.

5. Attach the retainer clips.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Racing or Other CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-8Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-12Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17Front Air Dam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Parking (ManualTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-25Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-29

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Active Handling System . . . . . 9-35Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-36Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-40Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-40

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-45Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-46California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-46Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.



Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑8.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be some



power brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Magnetic Effort Steering

This system continuously adjuststhe effort felt when steering at allvehicle speeds. It provides easewhen parking, yet a firm, solid feelat highway speeds.

Variable Effort Steering

Some vehicles have a steeringsystem that varies the amount ofeffort required to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effortrequired is less at slower speeds tomake the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park. Atfaster speeds, the steering effortincreases to provide a sport-like feelto the steering. this providesmaximum control and stability.

If the vehicle seems harder to steerthan normal when parking or drivingslowly, there may be a problem withthe system. The vehicle will stillhave power steering, but steeringwill be stiffer than normal at slowspeeds. See your dealer for service.

Hydraulic Power Steering

This vehicle has hydraulic powersteering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid on page 10‑31.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or asystem malfunction, the vehicle canbe steered but may requiredincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.



Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.



Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Racing or OtherCompetitive DrivingRacing or competitive driving mayaffect the vehicle warranty. See thewarranty book before using thevehicle for racing or othercompetitive driving.

Notice: If you use the vehicle forracing or other competitivedriving, the engine may use moreoil than it would with normal use.Low oil levels can damage theengine. For information on how toadd oil, see Engine Oil onpage 10‑13.

Z06, ZR1, manual transmissionGrand Sport Coupe and 427Convertible only: Be sure tocheck the oil level often duringracing or other competitivedriving and keep the level at ornear the upper mark that showsthe proper operating range on theengine oil dipstick.

Except Z06, ZR1, manualtransmission Grand Sport Coupeand 427 Convertible : Be sure tocheck the oil level often duringracing or other competitivedriving and keep the level at ornear 1 L (1 qt) above the uppermark that shows the properoperating range on the engine oildipstick. After the competitivedriving, remove excess oil so thatthe level on the dipstick is notabove the upper mark that showsthe proper operating range.

Z06, ZR1, manual transmissionGrand Sport Coupe and 427Convertible Only: For racing orcompetitive driving, it isrecommended that the brake fluidbe replaced with a high performancebrake fluid that has a dry boilingpoint greater than 279°C (534°F).After conversion to the highperformance brake fluid, follow thebrake fluid servicerecommendations outlined by thefluid manufacturer. Do not usesilicone or DOT-5 brake fluids.

Z06, ZR1, and manual transmissionGrand Sport Coupe Only: For racingor competitive driving, it isrecommended that the loading ofthe vehicle be limited to the driveronly, with no other cargo, and thattires be inflated to 180 kPa (26 psi)for a maximum speed of 230 km/h(143 mph).

If the vehicle is a Z06, ZR1,or manual transmission Grand SportCoupe and 427 Convertible model,it has greaseable outer ends onboth of the rear toe-links. Undernormal use, lubrication should beperformed as described in themaintenance schedule. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 and RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑12. If using the vehicle forracing, lubrication should beperformed at the end of each racingday. See your dealer for lubricationand make sure any needed repairsare made at once. Properprocedures for performing these



services can be found in the servicemanual. See Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 13‑16.

If the vehicle is used for racing orother competitive driving, the rearaxle fluid temperatures may behigher than would occur in normaldriving. We recommend that therear axle fluid be drained andrefilled with new fluid after every24 hours of racing or competitivedriving. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12 forwhat fluid to use.

Z06 with Z07 and ZR1Performance Package BrakeBurnish Procedure

Notice: These procedures arespecific to the Z06 and ZR1Performance Package withceramic brake rotors. Theseprocedures should not be run onother Corvette models as damagemay result.

Notice: The new vehicle break‐inperiod should be completedbefore performing the brakeburnish procedure or damagemay occur to the powertrain/engine. See New Vehicle Break-Inon page 9‑17.

When performed as instructed,these procedures will not damagethe brakes. During the burnishingprocedure, the brake pads willsmoke and produce an odor. Thebraking force and pedal travel mayincrease. After the procedure iscomplete, the brake pads mayappear white at the rotor contact.

Street High Performance BrakeBurnishing Procedure

Run this procedure in a safemanner and in compliance with alllocal and state ordinances/lawsregarding motor vehicle operation.Run this procedure only on drypavement.

1. From a stop, accelerate asrapidly as possible withoutactivating traction control to aspeed of 97 kph (60 mph).

2. Use enough pedal force tocompletely stop the vehicle infour to five seconds. If ABSactivates, braking is too hard.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2,five times. This should takeabout 10 minutes.

4. After completing the 50 stops,cool the brakes by driving for8 km (5 mi) at 97 kph (60 mph).

As with all high performance brakesystems, some amount of brakesqueal is normal.

Racing/Track Brake BurnishProcedure

To prepare the ZR1 and Z06 withZ07 Performance Package brakesystem for track events and racing,the Street High Performance BrakeBurnish as described previouslyshould be completed.



In addition to completing the StreetHigh Performance Brake BurnishingProcedure, the following procedureneeds to be completed to make theZR1 and Z06 with Z07 PerformancePackage brake system ready fortrack events and racing.

This procedure should only be runon a track and only on drypavement.

Notice: Brake pedal fade willoccur during this track burnishprocedure and can cause brakepedal travel and force to increase.This could extend stoppingdistance until the brakes are fullyburnished.

1. Drive a normal first lap and nottoo aggressive.

2. Laps 2 and 3 should begradually driven faster and moreaggressive, while allowing forreduced brake output andincreased stopping distance dueto brake fade.

3. Lap 4 as near to full speed, whileallowing for reduced brakeoutput and increased stoppingdistance due to brake fade.

4. Laps 5 and 6 should be cooldown laps

5. Lap 7 should be normal drivingor an easy out lap.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.



Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑52.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.



{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.Steering may also be affectedwhen ignition is off. You couldcrash. Always have the enginerunning and the vehicle in gearwhen going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall,resulting in even less traction. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated with saltor sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9‑32.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑10. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) which

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

cannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.



If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑34.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.

Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑79.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.



{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar) of your vehicle. Withthe driver door open, you willfind the label attached below thedoor latch. This label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10‑52 and Tire Pressureon page 10‑60.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification label. It tells you theGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axle. See“Certification Label” later in thissection.



Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Your vehicle is neitherdesigned nor intended to towa trailer.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 181 kg (400 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 1 = 68 kg(150 lbs)

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 113 kg (250 lbs)



Example 2



C. Available Cargo Weight = 45 kg(100 lbs)

Example 3



C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengersand cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the rearedge of the driver door. It tellsyou the gross weight capacity ofyour vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants, fueland cargo. Never exceed the



GVWR for your vehicle, or theGross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either thefront or rear axle.

Do not load your vehicle withmore weight than it wasdesigned to carry. See “Stepsfor Determining Correct LoadLimit” earlier in this section.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages or anythingelse — they will go as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there isa crash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the rear areaof your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InFollow these recommendedguidelines during the first 2414 km(1500mi) of driving this vehicle.Parts have a break-in period andperformance will be better in thelong run.

For the first 322 km (200 mi):. To break in new tires, drive at

moderate speeds and avoid hardcornering for the first 322 km(200 mi).

. New brake linings also need abreak- in period. Avoid makinghard stops during the first322 km (200mi). This isrecommended every time brakelinings are replaced.

For the first 800 km (500 mi):. Avoid full throttle starts and

abrupt stops.. Do not exceed 4000 rpm.. Avoid driving at any one

constant speed, fast or slow,including the use of cruisecontrol.

. Avoid downshifting to brake orslow the vehicle when theengine speed will exceed4000 rpm.

. Do not let the engine labor.Never lug the engine in highgear at low speeds. With amanual transmission, shift to thenext lower gear. This ruleapplies at all times, not justduring the break-in period.

For the first 2414 km (1500mi):. Do not participate in track

events, sport driving schools,or similar activities during thefirst 2414 km (1500 mi).

. Check engine oil with everyrefueling and add if necessary.Oil and fuel consumption may behigher than normal during thefirst 2414 km (1500 mi).

Front Air DamThe vehicle is equipped with a frontair dam which has minimal groundclearance.

Vehicles with the ZR1 package, 427convertibles or Z06 vehicles withRPO CFZ, also come with a splittermade from carbon fiber.



{ WARNING

ZR1s, 427 convertibles and Z06swith RPO CFZ, contain partsmade from carbon fiber.

When damaged, the exposededges can be very sharp.A person could be injured bythese sharp edges. Use cautionwhen washing the vehicle,coming in contact with,or removing damaged carbonfiber parts. See your dealer forreplacement.

Under normal operation, thesecomponents will occasionallycontact some road surfaces (speedbumps, driveway ramps, etc.). Thiscan be heard inside the vehicle as ascraping noise. This is normal anddoes not indicate a problem.

Use care when approaching bumpsor objects on road surfaces andavoid them when possible.

Ignition Positions

The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with a push-buttonstart.

In order to shift out of P (Park), thevehicle must be running or inAcc. mode and the regular brakepedal must be applied.

/ (START): Press this buttonwhile your foot is on the brake foran automatic transmission, or whilepressing in the clutch for a manualtransmission, to start the engine.If the vehicle is in OFF or Retained

Accessory Power (RAP) mode, theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter must be inside thevehicle to start the engine.

9 Acc. (STOPPING THE ENGINE/OFF/ACCESSORY): When thevehicle is stopped with the engineon, press the button once to turn theengine off.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.



3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑33

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

When the engine is on or thevehicle is in accessory power mode,it is recommended that a manualtransmission be placed inR (Reverse). An automatictransmission must be placed in

P (Park). Then press the Acc. buttonto turn the engine off and place thevehicle in RAP. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑21 for more information.If an automatic vehicle is notcorrectly placed in P (Park) a SHIFTTO PARK message will display onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

For more information, seeTransmission Messages onpage 5‑50.

When the engine is off, press thisbutton to place the vehicle inaccessory mode. ACCESSORYMODEON will display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). This modeallows you to use things like theradio and the power windows whilethe engine is off. Use accessorymode if you must have the vehiclein motion while the engine is off, forexample, if the vehicle is beingpushed or towed.

After being in accessory mode forabout 10 minutes, the vehicle willautomatically enter RAP or OFF,depending on if the doors areopened or closed.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off,pressing and holding the bottom ofthe button for more thanfive seconds will place the vehicle inService Only Mode. The instrumentsand audio systems will operate asthey do when the engine is running,but the vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Push the buttonagain to turn the vehicle off.



Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral) for an automatictransmission. For a manualtransmission the vehicle can bestarted in Neutral or any other gearas long as the clutch pedal ispressed. To restart a vehicle with amanual transmission when you arealready moving, use the Neutralposition only. To restart a vehiclewith an automatic transmissionwhen you are already moving, useN (Neutral).

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

The RKE transmitter must be insidethe vehicle for the ignition to work.

Cell phone chargers can interferewith the operation of the KeylessAccess System. Battery chargersshould not be plugged in whenstarting or turning off the engine.

To start the vehicle, do the following:

1. For vehicles with an automatictransmission, with your foot onthe brake pedal, press theSTART button located on theinstrument panel. For vehicleswith a manual transmission, youmust also press in the clutchpedal while pressing the STARTbutton.

If there is not an RKE transmitterin the vehicle or if there issomething causing interferencewith it, the DIC will displayNO FOBS DETECTED. See Keyand Lock Messages onpage 5‑40 for more information.

2. When the engine beginscranking, let go of the button andthe engine cranks automaticallyuntil it starts. If the battery in theRKE transmitter is weak, theDIC displays FOB BATTERYLOW. You can still drive thevehicle.

See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.If the fob battery is dead, youneed to insert the fob into thefob slot to enable enginestarting. See “NO FOBSDETECTED” under Key andLock Messages on page 5‑40.

3. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

4. If the engine does not start andno DIC message is displayed,wait 15 seconds before tryingagain to let the cranking motorcool down.

If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the way



to the floor while cranking for upto 15 seconds maximum. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat thesesteps. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by pressingthe START button immediatelyafter cranking has ended, canoverheat and damage thecranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. Once cranking hasbeen initiated, the engine continuescranking for a few seconds or untilthe vehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start, cranking automatically

stops after 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engine isalready running.

Notice: If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9‑50.

Stopping the Engine

If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, move the shift lever toP (Park) and press and hold theAcc. (Off/Accessory) button, locatedon the instrument panel, until theengine shuts off. If the shift lever isnot in P (Park), the engine shuts offand the vehicle goes into theaccessory mode. The DIC displaysSHIFT TO PARK. Once the shifter ismoved to P (Park), the vehicle turnsoff. If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, it is recommendedthat you move the shift lever to

R (Reverse) and set the parkingbrake after you turn off the engineby pressing and holding the Acc.(Off/Accessory) button.

If the RKE transmitter is notdetected inside the vehicle when itis turned to off, the DIC displaysNO FOB –OFF OR RUN?.

See Key and Lock Messages onpage 5‑40 for more information.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows

These features continue to work upto 10 minutes after the engine isturned off or until either door isopened. If a door is opened, thepower windows and audio systemwill shut off.



Shifting Into Park(Automatic Transmission)1. Hold the brake pedal down and

set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑33 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on thelever and pushing the lever allthe way toward the front of thevehicle.

3. Press the Acc. button (ignitionswitch) to turn the engine off.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 9‑22.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), holddown the regular brake pedal. See ifyou can move the shift lever awayfrom P (Park) without first pushingthe button on the lever. If you can, itmeans that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock (AutomaticTransmission)

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park) properly before you leave



the driver seat. To find out how, see“Shifting Into P (Park)” previously inthis section.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the transmissionparking pawl, so you can pull theshift lever out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkShift lock release prevents shiftingout of P (Park) unless the vehicle isrunning or in accessory mode andthe brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9‐volt) battery. See Jump Startingon page 10‑75 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park) use thefollowing:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Release the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑33.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

Parking (ManualTransmission)Before you get out of the vehicle,move the shift lever into R (Reverse)and firmly apply the parking brake.Once the shift lever has beenplaced into R (Reverse) with theclutch pedal pressed in, you canturn the ignition off and release theclutch.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 9‑22 andEngine Exhaust on page 9‑24. If thevehicle has a manual transmission,see Parking (Manual Transmission)on page 9‑23.



AutomaticTransmission

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 9‑22.

Be sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.

The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply thebrakes and then press the shift leverbutton before you can shift fromP (Park) when the vehicle is

running. If you cannot shift out ofP (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever and push the shift lever all theway into P (Park) as you maintainbrake application. Then press theshift lever button and move the shiftlever into another gear. See Shiftingout of Park on page 9‑23.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑12.



N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. If the vehicle needstowing, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑79.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, push the pedaldown to achieve the desired level ofacceleration.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑5.

S (Sport Mode): When inS (Sport Mode), the transmission willwork as an automatic until you usethe Manual Paddle Shift Controls,which activates driver manual gearselection. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑26. While in S (Sport Mode),the transmission will have morenoticeable upshifts for sportiervehicle performance.

Manual Mode

Manual Paddle Shift

While in S (Sport Mode), the paddleslocated on the steering wheel canbe used to manually up-shift ordown-shift the transmission.

The Manual Paddle Shift system isactivated from S (Sport Mode) bypushing the paddle, above thesteering wheel spokes, to up-shift tothe next gear, or pulling on thepaddle, behind the steering wheelspokes, to down-shift to thenext gear.



When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift to 2 (Second)or 3 (Third) gear. A higher gearallows you to gain more traction onslippery surfaces. If traction controlis active, upshifts are delayed toincrease your control of the vehicle.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑34 Traction ControlSystem (TCS).

The Manual Paddle Shift systemcan be deactivated by moving theshift lever from S (Sport Mode) backto D (Drive), or by holding eitherup-shift paddle for more thanone second.

The driver may choose to brieflyactivate the Manual Paddle Shiftsystem while in D (Drive). Tappingeither the upshift or downshiftcontrols will place the transmissionin Manual Paddle Shift mode. Thedriver may then exit Manual PaddleShift mode by holding either upshiftcontrol for more than one second.The system will return to automaticshifting after 10 seconds of cruising

at a steady speed and no manualshifts, or when the vehicle comes toa stop.

While the Manual Paddle Shift gearselection system is active, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift through the gears as thevehicle slows. The transmission willselect 2 (Second) gear as thevehicle stops. From a stop, thevehicle will start from and hold2 (Second) gear unless the drivermanually paddle shifts into adifferent gear or selects D (Drive).The driver can select 1 (First) gearfor maximum acceleration froma stop.

When using the Manual PaddleShift feature while in S (Sport Mode),the current gear will be displayed in

the Driver Information (DIC), or theHead-Up Display (HUD), if thevehicle has either of these features.

If the vehicle has a Head-UpDisplay (HUD), see Head-UpDisplay (HUD) on page 5‑30.

The Manual Paddle Shift system willnot allow either an up-shift or adown-shift if the vehicle speed is toofast or too slow, nor will it allow astart from 4 (Fourth) or higher gear.

If up-shifting does not occur whenneeded, vehicle speed will belimited to protect the engine.

When the transmission gear doesnot respond to a shift change, theDIC will show an X over the geardisplay.



When a requested shift is denieddue to the speed restrictions shown,the DIC will momentarily show an Xover the gear display and a chimewill sound.

If the vehicle has a HUD, and thetransmission gear does not respondto a shift change, a chime will soundand the HUD will momentarily showan X over the gear display.

Manual Paddle Shift operation isavailable for use with CruiseControl. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑42 Cruise Control for moreinformation.

The vehicle speeds required forManual Paddle Shift up-shiftsdepend on several vehicle inputs,which will vary the allowed up-shiftspeed by a few km/h (mph).

For vehicles with a 2.56:1 AxleRatio (RPOGM8). Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear

require approximately 35 km/h(22 mph).

. Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear requireapproximately 45 km/h (28 mph).

. Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gearrequire approximately 65 km/h(41 mph).

To prevent damage to thepowertrain, Manual Paddledownshifts to a lower gear cannotbe done above certain speeds. Themaximum speed allowed fordownshifting of gears 1 (First)through 4 (Fourth) are:. Into 4 (Fourth) gear over

250 km/h (155 mph).. Into 3 (Third) gear over 188 km/h

(117 mph).

. Into 2 (Second) gear over120 km/h (75 mph).

. Into 1 (First) gear over 68 km/h(42 mph).

For vehicles with a 2.73:1 AxleRatio (RPOGU2, Grand Sportmodels). Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear

require approximately 31 km/h(19 mph).

. Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear requireapproximately 39 km/h (24 mph).

. Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gearrequire approximately 57 km/h(35 mph).

To prevent damage to thepowertrain, Manual Paddledownshifts to a lower gear cannotbe done above certain speeds. Themaximum speed allowed fordownshifting of gears 1 (First)through 4 (Fourth) are:. Into 4 (Fourth) gear over

234 km/h (145 mph).



. Into 3 (Third) gear over 176 km/h(109 mph).

. Into 2 (Second) gear over113 km/h (70 mph).

. Into 1 (First) gear over 64 km/h(40 mph).

If the driver does not request anupshift as the engine speedapproaches fuel shut off rpm, theengine speed will be limited toprotect the engine. See Tachometeron page 5‑12 for more information.

Manual Transmission

This is the shift pattern for thesix-speed manual transmission.

Here is how to operate thetransmission:

1 (First): Press the clutch pedaland shift into 1 (First). Then slowlylet up on the clutch pedal as youpress the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into 1 (First) when youare going less than 64 km/h(40 mph). If you come to a completestop and it is hard to shift into1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutraland let up on the clutch. Press theclutch pedal back down. Then shiftinto 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) thesame way you do for 2 (Second).Slowly let up on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.



Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine. Theshift lever is in Neutral when it iscentered in the shift pattern, not inany gear.

R (Reverse): To back up, pressdown the clutch pedal and shift intoR (Reverse). Just apply pressure toget the lever past 5 (Fifth) and6 (Sixth) into R (Reverse). Let up onthe clutch pedal slowly whilepressing the accelerator pedal.

The six-speed manual transmissionhas a feature that allows you tosafely shift into R (Reverse) whilethe vehicle is rolling at less than5 km/h (3 mph). You will be lockedout if you try to shift intoR (Reverse) while the vehicle ismoving faster than 5 km/h (3 mph).

Shift Speeds(Manual Transmission)

{ WARNING

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

This chart shows when to shift tothe next higher gear for the best fueleconomy.



Manual Transmission RecommendedShift Speeds in km/h (mph)

Engine Acceleration Shift Speed

1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6

All Engines 24 (15) 40 (25) 64 (40) 72 (45) 80 (50)

If the engine speed drops below900 rpm, or if the engine is notrunning smoothly, you shoulddownshift to the next lower gear.You may have to downshift two ormore gears to keep the enginerunning smoothly or for good engineperformance.

Notice: When shifting gears, donot move the shift lever aroundunnecessarily. This may damagethe transmission. Shift directlyinto the next gear.

One to Four Shift Light(Manual Transmission)

When this light comes on, you canonly shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth)instead of 1 (First) to 2 (Second).

See One-to-Four Shift Light (ManualTransmission) on page 5‑21 formore information.

Downshifting(Manual Transmission)

Do not downshift into the gearshown below at a speed greaterthan shown in the table:

1 (First) 80 km/h (50 mph)

2 (Second) 119 km/h (74 mph)

3 (Third) 163 km/h(101 mph)

4 (Fourth) 209 km/h(130 mph)

Notice: If you skip more than onegear when you downshift, or ifyou race the engine when yourelease the clutch pedal whiledownshifting, you could damagethe engine, clutch, driveshaft orthe transmission. Do not skipgears or race the engine whendownshifting.

The six-speed transmission has aspring that centers the shift levernear 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth). Thisspring helps you know which gearyou are in when you are shifting.



Be careful when shifting from1 (First) to 2 (Second) ordownshifting from 6 (Sixth) to5 (Fifth). The spring will try to pullthe shift lever toward 4 (Fourth) and3 (Third). Make sure you move thelever into 2 (Second) or 5 (Fifth).If you let the shift lever move in thedirection of the pulling, you may endup shifting from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth)or from 6 (Sixth) to 3 (Third).

If the driver does not upshift as theengine speed approaches fuel shutoff RPM, the engine speed will belimited to protect the engine. SeeTachometer on page 5‑12 for moreinformation.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑21.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.



Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking BrakeThe parking brake lever is located tothe right of the center console.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down. Pull the parkingbrake lever up. If the ignition is on,the brake system warning light willcome on.

To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down. Then pushthe release button in as you movethe parking brake lever all theway down.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. Thebrake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.



Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that therear wheels are spinning too muchor are beginning to lose traction.When this happens, the systemworks the rear brakes and reducesengine power (by closing the throttleand managing engine spark) to limitwheel spin.

The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVEmessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) when TCSis limiting wheel spin. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑42. The system may beheard or felt while it is working, butthis is normal.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS begins to limit wheel spin, thecruise control will automaticallydisengage. Cruise control may bereengaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑42.

The SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEMmessage and the Active HandlingSystem light will come on if there isa problem with TCS. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑42.

When this light and the SERVICETRACTION SYSTEM message areon, the system will not limit wheelspin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

TCS automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started. Tolimit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on. TCS canbe turned off if needed.

To turn the system off, press theActive Handling button located onthe center console.

The Traction Off light comes on.



The system can be turned on or offat any time by pressing the ActiveHandling button. The DIC willdisplay the appropriate messagewhen the button is pushed.

Notice: When traction control isturned off, or Competitive DrivingMode is active, it is possible tolose traction. If you attempt toshift with the drive wheelsspinning with a loss of traction, itis possible to cause damage tothe transmission. Do not attemptto shift when the drive wheels donot have traction. Damage causedby misuse of the vehicle is notcovered. See the warranty bookfor additional information.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.

Active Handling SystemThe Active Handling System is acomputer controlled system thathelps the driver maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. This isaccomplished by selectivelyapplying any one of the vehicle'sbrakes.

The ACTIVE HANDLING messagewill come on when the system isoperating. See Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5‑42 for moreinformation. The system may beheard or felt while it is working. Thisis normal.

The SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLINGSYSTEM message is displayed onthe DIC, the Active Handling

System light comes on, and a soundis heard if there is a problem withthe system.

See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑42 for more information.

When this light and the SERVICEACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEMmessage are on, the system is notoperational. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The Active Handling System comeson automatically whenever thevehicle is started. To help maintaindirectional control of the vehicle, thesystem should always be left on.The system can be turned off ifneeded. If the Active HandlingSystem is turned off, the TractionControl System will also be turnedoff. Adjust your driving accordingly.



To turn the system off, pressthe Active Handling button on thecenter console until TRACTIONSYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLINGSYSTEM — OFF is displayed onthe DIC.

The StabiliTrak Off light willcome on.

The system can be turned back onat any time by pressing the ActiveHandling button. The DIC willdisplay the appropriate messagewhen the button is pushed.

If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system detects a flat tire and theDriver Information Center (DIC)displays TIRE FLAT, or if the TPMsystem is malfunctioning and theDIC displays SERVICE TIREMONITOR, the Active HandlingSystem will be affected as follows:. The Active Handling System

cannot be turned off by thedriver.

. If the Active Handling System isoff, it will be turned onautomatically.

. Competitive Driving Mode orPerformance TractionManagement is unavailable.

. The Active Handling System willfeel different in aiding andmaintaining directional control.

Competitive Driving ModeCompetitive Driving Mode,Performance Traction Management,and Launch Control are systemsdesigned to allow increased

performance while accelerating and/or cornering. This is accomplishedby regulating and optimizing theengine, brakes, and suspensionperformance. These modes are foruse at a closed course race trackand are not intended for use onpublic roads. They will notcompensate for driver inexperienceor lack of familiarity with the racetrack. Drivers who prefer to allowthe system to have more control ofthe engine, brake, and suspensionare advised to turn the normaltraction control and active handlingsystems on. See Racing or OtherCompetitive Driving on page 9‑6.

Notice: Do not attempt to shiftwhen the drive wheels arespinning and do not havetraction. This may cause damageto the transmission. Damagecaused by misuse of the vehicleis not covered by the vehiclewarranty. See the warranty bookfor additional information.



Competitive Driving Mode(Except Z06 with magneticSelective Ride Control or ZR1)

Competitive Driving Mode allows fullengine power while the ActiveHandling System helps maintaindirectional control of the vehicle byselective brake application. In thismode, TCS is off and LaunchControl is available. Adjust yourdriving style to account for theavailable engine power. See“Launch Control” later in thissection.

This light is on when the vehicle isin the Competitive Driving Mode.

This optional handling mode can beselected by pressing the ActiveHandling button on the centerconsole quickly two times.

COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODEdisplays in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑42.

When the Active Handling button ispressed again, the Active Handlingand TCS systems are on. TheTRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVEHANDLING-ON message displaysbriefly in the DIC and a chime isheard.

Performance TractionManagement (Z06 withmagnetic Selective RideControl or ZR1)

Performance Traction Managementintegrates the Traction Control,Active Handling, and Selective RideControl systems to provideimproved and consistentperformance when cornering. Theamount of available engine power isbased on the mode selected, trackconditions, driver skill, and theradius of each corner.

This light is on when the vehicle isin the Performance TractionManagement Mode.

This optional handling mode can beselected by pressing the ActiveHandling button on the centerconsole quickly two times. PERFTRAC 1 - WET ACTIVE HANDLINGON displays in the DIC.

To experience the performancebenefit of this system, after enteringa curve and at the point where thedriver would normally start toincrease acceleration, theaccelerator pedal can be fullypressed. The Performance TractionManagement system will modify thelevel of engine power for a smoothand consistent corner exit.



To select a mode while inPerformance Traction Management,turn the knob on the center console.

The Performance TractionManagement system contains fivemodes. These modes are selectedby turning the Selective RideControl/Performance TractionManagement knob on the centerconsole. The driver scrolls up ordown through modes 1–5 by turningthe knob to the right or left.

The following is a DIC displaydescription and the recommendedusage of each mode:

PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVEHANDLING ON. Intended for all driver skill levels. Wet or damp conditions only —

not intended for use in heavyrain or standing water

. Active Handling is on and enginepower is reduced based onconditions

PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVEHANDLING ON. For use by less experienced

drivers or while learning a newtrack

. Dry conditions only

. Active Handling is on and enginepower is slightly reduced

PERF TRAC 3 – SPORTACTIVE HANDLING ON. For use by drivers who are

familiar with the track. Dry conditions only. Requires more driving skill than

mode 2. Active Handling is on and more

engine power is available than inmode 2

PERF TRAC 4 – SPORTACTIVE HANDLING OFF. For use by drivers who are

familiar with the track. Dry conditions only. Requires more driving skill than

modes 2 or 3. Active Handling is off and

available engine power is thesame as mode 3



PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVEHANDLING OFF. For use by experienced drivers

who are familiar with the track. Dry conditions only. Requires more driving skill than

in other modes. Active Handling is off and engine

power is available for maximumcornering speed

Press and release the ActiveHandling button to turn offPerformance Traction Managementand return to the Active Handlingand Traction Control Systems. TheTRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVEHANDLING-ON message displaysbriefly in the DIC and a chime isheard.

Launch Control

A Launch Control feature isavailable, within Competitive DrivingMode (except Z06 with magneticSelective Ride Control or ZR1) orPerformance Traction Management

(Z06 with magnetic Selective RideControl or ZR1), on vehicles with amanual transmission to allow thedriver to achieve high levels ofvehicle acceleration in a straightline. Launch Control is a form oftraction control that manages tirespin while launching the vehicle.This feature is intended for useduring closed course race eventswhere consistent zero to sixtyand quarter mile times aredesirable.

Launch Control is only availablewhen the following criteria are met:. Competitive Driving Mode is

selected (except Z06 withmagnetic Selective Ride Controlor ZR1) or any of thePerformance TractionManagement modes areselected (Z06 with magneticSelective Ride Control or ZR1).The TCS light comes on theinstrument panel and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays.

. The vehicle is not moving.

. The steering wheel is pointingstraight.

. The clutch is pressed and thevehicle is in first gear.

. The accelerator pedal is rapidlyapplied to wide open throttle.

The Launch Control feature willinitially limit engine speed as thedriver rapidly applies the acceleratorpedal to wide open throttle.A smooth, quick release of theclutch, while maintaining the fullypressed accelerator pedal, willmanage wheel slip. Complete shiftsas described in ManualTransmission on page 9‑29.

After the vehicle is launched, thesystem continues in CompetitiveMode (except Z06 with magneticSelective Ride Control or ZR1) orPerformance Traction Management(Z06 with magnetic Selective RideControl or ZR1).



Competitive Driving Mode,Performance Traction Management,and Launch Control are systemsdesigned for a closed course racetrack and not intended for use onpublic roads. The systems are notintended to compensate for lack ofdriver experience or familiarity withthe race track.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleVehicles with a limited-slip rear axlecan give more traction on snow,mud, ice, sand or gravel. It workslike a standard axle most of thetime, but when traction is low, thisfeature allows the drive wheel withthe most traction to move thevehicle.

Selective Ride ControlThe vehicle may have a ride controlsystem called magnetic SelectiveRide Control. The system providesthe following performance benefits:. Reduced Impact Harshness

. Improved Road Isolation

. Improved High-Speed Stability

. Improved Handling Response

. Better Control of Body RideMotions

Except Z06 with magneticSelective Ride Control or ZR1

This knob is on the center console.Turn it to select the suspension ofyour choice.

TOUR: Use for normal city andhighway driving. This settingprovides a smooth, soft ride.

SPORT: Use where road conditionsor personal preference demandmore control. This setting providesmore “feel,” or response to the roadconditions.

The setting can be changed at anytime. Based on road conditions,steering wheel angle, and thevehicle speed, the systemautomatically adjusts to provide thebest handling while providing asmooth ride. The Tour and Sportmodes will feel similar on a smoothroad. Select a new setting wheneverdriving conditions change.

Three Driver InformationCenter (DIC) messages (SERVICERIDE CONTROL, SHOCKSINOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUMSPEED 129 KM/H (80 MPH) displaywhen a malfunction occurs with theSelective Ride Control system.Refer to Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5‑42.



Z06 with magnetic SelectiveRide Control with PTM or ZR1

This knob is on the center console.Turn it to select the suspension ofyour choice. The knob will return tothe center position when released.The switch will illuminate the currentsuspension setting.

TOUR: Use for normal city andhighway driving. This settingprovides a smooth, soft ride.

SPORT: Use where road conditionsor personal preference demandmore control. This setting providesmore “feel,” or response to the roadconditions.

The setting can be changed at anytime. Based on road conditions,steering wheel angle, and thevehicle speed, the systemautomatically adjusts to provide thebest handling while providing asmooth ride. The Tour and Sportmodes will feel similar on a smoothroad. Select a new setting wheneverdriving conditions change.

The Selective Ride knob will notdisplay the Tour or Sport settingwhen the Performance TractionManagement mode is selected.When this mode is selected, turningthe Selective Ride knob will changethe Performance TractionManagement mode and thesuspension setting will bedetermined automatically. SeeCompetitive Driving Mode onpage 9‑36.

Three Driver Information Center(DIC) messages (SERVICE RIDECONTROL, SHOCKSINOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUMSPEED 129 KM/H (80 MPH) displaywhen a malfunction occurs with theSelective Ride Control system.Refer to Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5‑42.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

Cruise control will not work if theparking brake is set, or if the mastercylinder brake fluid level is low.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If the vehicle is in cruise control,and has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), and it begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise controlautomatically disengages. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑34. When road conditionsallow the cruise control to be safelyused again, it can be turnedback on.

The vehicle has cruise control.

9 (Off): Turns the system off.

R (On): Turns the system on.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Makesthe vehicle accelerate or resume apreviously set speed.

T (Set): Press this button at theend of the lever to set the speed.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

1. Move the cruise control switchto on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. PressT at the end of the leverand release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

When the cruise control is engaged,the CRUISE SET TO XXX MPHmessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeCruise Control Messages onpage 5‑37.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.



Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,move the cruise control switchbriefly from R to +. The vehiclereturns to the previous set speedand stays there.

If the switch is held at resume/accelerate, the vehicle keeps goingfaster until the switch is released orthe brake is applied. Do not hold theswitch at resume/accelerate, unlessyou want the vehicle to go faster.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Use the accelerator pedal to get

to the higher speed. PressJ atthe end of the lever, then releasethe button and the acceleratorpedal. If the accelerator pedal isheld longer than 60 seconds,cruise control will turn off.

. Move the cruise switch from R to+. Hold it there until desiredspeed is reached, and thenrelease the switch.

. To increase the vehicle speed insmall amounts, move the switchbriefly to +. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the set button

until the lower speed desired isreached, then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,briefly pressJ. Each time thisis done, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might want to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle's speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruise controlis disengaged.



Cruise Control in Sport andManual Paddle Shift GearSelection

When the vehicle is in S (Sport) andthe manual paddle shift controls arenot being used, cruise controloperates in the same manner asD (Drive).

When the vehicle is in S (Sport) andthe manual paddle shift controls arebeing used, cruise control operatesas follows:. If cruise control is active and a

gear is selected with the manualpaddle shift controls, the vehiclespeed is maintained in the driverselected gear and will notautomatically up-shift ordown-shift the transmissionwhile the driver’s gear selectionis active.

. If driving in hilly terrain, cruisecontrol may not be able tomaintain vehicle speed if anup-shift or down-shift is notselected by the driver. Whiledriving on hilly terrain and cruisecontrol is active with a manualpaddle shift gear selection, thedriver must select the propergear for the terrain or selectD (Drive) on the gear rangeselector for full automatictransmission operation.

Ending Cruise Control. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, lightly tap theclutch to end the cruise controlsession.

. To turn off the cruise controlsystem, move the cruise controlswitch to9.

When cruise control is disengaged,the CRUISE DISENGAGEDmessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeCruise Control Messages onpage 5‑37.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by moving theswitch to9 or if the ignition isturned off.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com. TOP TIERgasoline is only available in the U.S.and Canada.

The eighth digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine. TheVIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

Recommended FuelIf the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine(VIN Code W), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. Youcan also use regular unleaded

gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, but the vehicle's accelerationcould be slightly reduced, and aslight audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard. If the octaneis less than 87, a heavy knockingnoise might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, you coulddamage the engine. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine(VIN Code T) or the 7.0L V8 engine(VIN Code E), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. Forbest performance, use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 93. In anemergency, you can use regularunleaded gasoline with an octanerating of 87 or higher. If 87 octanefuel is used, do not perform anyaggressive driving maneuvers such



as wide open throttle applications.You might also hear audible sparkknock during acceleration. Refill thetank with premium fuel as soon aspossible to avoid damaging theengine. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at91 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑46.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. See

the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, or any other fuel not

recommended. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list of



marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of Fuel System TreatmentPLUS, part number 88861013,added to the fuel tank at everyengine oil change, can help cleandeposits from fuel injectors andintake valves. GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle.

The fuel door release button islocated on the instrument panel tothe left of the steering wheel. Pushthe button to release the fuel door.

There is also a manual fuel doorrelease tab. It is located against theupper trim in the rear compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle. Pullthe tab to release the fuel door.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, let the cap hang bythe tether below the fuel fill opening.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the



nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑79.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑18.

The CHECK GAS CAP messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) if the fuel cap is notproperly installed. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑40 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it maynot fit properly. This may causethe malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.



Towing

General TowingInformationThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Some electricalequipment can damage thevehicle or cause components tonot work and would not becovered by the warranty. Alwayscheck with your dealer beforeadding electrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑24 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑25.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Lifting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-19Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-21Cooling System (Engine) . . . 10-24

Cooling System(Intercooler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-29Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-31Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-38Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-39

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Windshield Replacement . . . 10-41

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-44Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Sport Cup Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-55


10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-72Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-79Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to


Vehicle Care 10-3

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑25.

Lifting the Vehicle

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle can cause aninjury. The vehicle can slip off thejack and roll over you or otherpeople. You and they could bebadly injured. Find a level placeto lift your vehicle. To helpprevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain thevehicle won't move, put blocks infront of and behind the wheels.


10-4 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle or the vehiclemay fall and cause you or othersinjury.

If you ever use a jack to lift yourvehicle, follow the instructions thatcame with the jack, and be sure touse the correct lifting points to avoiddamaging your vehicle.

Notice: Lifting your vehicleimproperly can damage yourvehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by yourwarranty. To lift your vehicleproperly, follow the advice inthis part.

To help prevent vehicle damage:. Be sure to place a block orpad between the jack and thevehicle.

. Make sure the jack you areusing spans at least twocrossmember ribs.

. Lift only in the areas shownin the following pictures.

For additional information, seeyour dealer and the ChevroletCorvette service manual.

Lifting From the Front

The front lifting points can beaccessed from either side of yourvehicle, behind the front tires.


Vehicle Care 10-5

1. Locate the front lifting points (A),according to the illustrationshown.

2. Be sure to place a block or padbetween the jack and thevehicle.

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack,making sure the jack spans atleast two of the crossmemberribs (B).

Lifting From the Rear

The rear lifting points can beaccessed from the rear of thevehicle, on either the driver's orpassenger's side.


10-6 Vehicle Care

1. Locate the rear lifting points (A),according to the illustrationshown.

2. Be sure to place a block or padbetween the jack and thevehicle.

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack,making sure the jack spans atleast two of the crossmemberribs (B).

For more information, see DoingYour Own Service Work onpage 10‑6.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑16.


Vehicle Care 10-7

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑24.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑15.

Notice: Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact thefluids, reservoir caps,or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release lever withthis symbol on it. It is locatedinside the vehicle below theinstrument panel on thedriver side.

2. Go to the side of the vehicle andpull up on the rear edge of thehood, near the windshield.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Then,just pull the hood down and close itfirmly.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

6.2L LS3 V8 Engine (Without dry sump engine oil tank)


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Clutch Master CylinderReservoir (If Equipped). SeeHydraulic Clutch on page 10‑21.

B. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑32.

C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See“Brake Fluid” under Brakes onpage 10‑32.

D. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑26.

E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑21.

F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑31.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under BrakeFluid on page 10‑36.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑13.

I. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑45.

J. Passenger Compartment AirFilter (Out of View). SeePassenger Compartment AirFilter on page 8‑6.

K. Battery on page 10‑37.

If the vehicle has the 6.2L LS3V8 engine (without the dry sumpengine oil tank) and you are facingthe front of the vehicle.


10-10 Vehicle Care

6.2L LS9 V8 Engine (Without engine cover)


Vehicle Care 10-11

A. Intercooler. See Cooling System(Engine) on page 10‑24 orCooling System (Intercooler) onpage 10‑25.

B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑21.

C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoirand Cap. See Power SteeringFluid on page 10‑31.

D. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑26.

E. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑32.

F. Clutch Master CylinderReservoir (If Equipped). SeeHydraulic Clutch on page 10‑21.

G. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See“Brake Fluid” under Brakes onpage 10‑32.

H. Passenger Compartment AirFilter (Out of View). SeePassenger Compartment AirFilter on page 8‑6.

I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑13.

J. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See“Changing Engine Oil and Filter”Brake Fluid on page 10‑36.

K. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑13.

L. Remote Positive (+) Terminal(Out of View). See JumpStarting on page 10‑75.

M. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑45.

If the vehicle has the 6.2L LS9Supercharged V8 engine and youare facing the front of the vehicle.


10-12 Vehicle Care

6.2L LS3 V8 Engine (With dry sump engine oil tank) or 7.0L LS7 V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-13

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑21.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑31.

C. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑45.

D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal(Out of View). See JumpStarting on page 10‑75.

E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑13.

F. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See“Changing Engine Oil and Filter”under Engine Oil onpage 10‑13.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑13.

H. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑26.

I. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑32.

J. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See“Brake Fluid” under Brake Fluidon page 10‑36.

K. Clutch Master CylinderReservoir. See Hydraulic Clutchon page 10‑21.

If the vehicle has the 6.2L LS3V8 engine with the manualtransmission (with the dry sumpengine oil tank) or the 7.0L LS7V8 engine and you are facing thedriver side of the vehicle.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑19.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


10-14 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil (ExceptZ06, ZR1, manual transmissionGrand Sport Coupe, and 427Convertible)

If the CHECK OIL LEVEL messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), check the engine oillevel right away. For moreinformation, see Engine OilMessages on page 5‑39. Check theengine oil level regularly; this is anadded reminder.

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑8 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ WARNING

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it witha paper towel or cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil(Except Z06, ZR1, manualtransmission Grand SportCoupe, and 427 Convertible)

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

See Racing or Other CompetitiveDriving on page 9‑6 for additionalinformation on engine oil.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑8 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange . Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Checking Engine Oil (Z06, ZR1,manual transmission GrandSport Coupe, and 427Convertible)

A. Engine Oil Dipstick

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is aloop. The dipstick is located on thedry sump engine oil tank.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑8 for the location of thedry sump engine oil tank.

These vehicles have aracetrack-ready dry sump enginelubrication system. Thishigh-performance system operatesdifferently than a standard enginelubrication system and requires aspecial procedure when checkingthe engine oil level. Follow thisprocedure closely when checkingthe engine oil level.

The engine oil level must bechecked when the engine is warm.Cold oil level in the dry sump tankmay not indicate the actual amountof oil in the system. With thissystem, engine oil is contained in anexternal tank, separate from theengine. Under normal operatingconditions, the oil pan under theengine does not store any oil. If thevehicle has been parked for anextended period without the enginebeing started, some oil will seepback into the oil pan, reducing theamount of oil held in the dry sump


10-16 Vehicle Care

tank and there could be no engineoil at all showing on the dipstick.This is normal since the dipstick isdesigned to read engine oil levelonly after the engine has run longenough to reach normal operatingtemperature. Do not add engine oilbased on cold engine dipstickreadings. The engine oil level on thedipstick will also be inaccurate ifchecked while the engine is running.

1. To obtain an accurate engine oillevel reading, warm up theengine to at least 80°C (175°F).Cold oil will not give a correct oillevel reading.

2. Once the engine is warm, turnoff the engine. Checking the oilwhile the engine is running willresult in an incorrect oil levelreading.

3. Wait at least five minutes (butnot more than 20 minutes) toallow oil to drain and settle in theengine.

{ WARNING

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

4. Remove the dipstick from theexternal engine oil tank andclean it with a lint-free papertowel or a cloth. Re-insert thedipstick into the external oil tank,pushing it all the way in until itstops.

5. Remove the dipstick from the oiltank and read the level on thecross-hatched area. Oil levelsthat fall in the cross-hatchedarea are normal.

When to Add Engine Oil (Z06,ZR1, manual transmissionGrand Sport Coupe, and 427Convertible)

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oilthrough the oil fill cap opening in theoil tank and then recheck the level.See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”for an explanation of what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

See Racing or Other CompetitiveDriving on page 9‑6 for additionalinformation on engine oil.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑8 for the location of theexternal engine oil tank and fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback into the oil tank when through.

Changing Engine Oil and Filter(Z06, ZR1, manualtransmission Grand SportCoupe, and 427 Convertible)

These vehicles have aracetrack-ready dry sump enginelubrication system. Thishigh-performance system operatesdifferently than a standard enginelubrication system and requires aspecial procedure when changingthe engine oil and filter. Follow thisprocedure closely when changingthe engine oil and filter.

Z06 Shown, ZR1, manualtransmission Grand Sport Coupe,

and 427 Convertible Similar

A. Engine Oil Drain Plugs

B. Seals

1. Remove the two engine oil drainplugs from the bottom of theengine oil pan. One drain plugdrains the external oil tank viathe oil transfer supply line. Theother drain plug drains residualoil from the crankcase sump.Allow the oil to drain.


10-18 Vehicle Care

2. Once the oil has been drainedfrom the engine, remove theengine oil filter and allow the oilto drain.

3. Re-install both drain plugs andtighten them to 25 Y (18 lb ft).

4. Replace the oil filter and tightenit to 30 Y (22 lb ft). SeeMaintenance Replacement Partson page 11‑14 for the correctfilter.

5. Oil is filled through the openingin the top of the external engineoil tank. Remove the oil fill cap.

6. Add 9.9 L (10.5 quarts) of oil tothe oil tank. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

7. Install the oil fill cap and insertthe dipstick, if removed.

8. Start the engine and let it run atidle for at least 15 seconds. Thiswill circulate the fresh engine oilthrough the lubrication system.

9. Shut off the engine and checkthe oil level as described under“Checking Engine Oil (Z06, ZR1,and Grand Sport).”

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification. Corvette recommendsMobil 1® engine oils that meet therequirements of the dexos1specification for its dry-sumpequipped engines.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oil


Vehicle Care 10-19

of the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or rags

containing used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer thatindicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

Z06, ZR1, manual transmissionGrand Sport Coupe, and 427Convertible models have aracetrack-ready dry sump enginelubrication system. Thishigh-performance system operatesdifferently than a standard enginelubrication system and requires aspecial procedure when changingthe engine oil and filter. See EngineOil on page 10‑13.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL message comes on. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600mi). It ispossible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the oil life systemmight indicate that an oil change isnot necessary for up to a year. Theengine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and,at this time, the system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is also


10-20 Vehicle Care

important to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Press the TRIP button so theOIL LIFE percentage isdisplayed.

2. Press RESET and hold fortwo seconds. OIL LIFEREMAINING 100% will appear.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

The vehicle is not equipped with atransmission fluid level dipstick.There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in the

service manual. To purchase aservice manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑16.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, and be sureto use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.


Vehicle Care 10-21

Manual TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired as soonas possible. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchIt is not necessary to regularlycheck clutch fluid unless yoususpect there is a leak in thesystem. Adding fluid will not correcta leak. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoircap has this symbol on it. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for reservoir location.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulefor the proper fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12. The fluidrequires changing every two years.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

How to Check and Add Fluid

Visually check the clutch fluidreservoir to make sure the fluid levelis at the MIN (minimum) line on the

side of the reservoir. The hydraulicclutch fluid system should be closedand sealed.

Do not remove the cap to check thefluid level or to top‐off the fluid level.Remove the cap only whennecessary to add the proper fluiduntil the level reaches the MIN line.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑8 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

Notice: If you spray water intothe engine air cleaner/filter intakeand water enters the engine aircleaner/filter housing, you coulddamage your vehicle's engine.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Do not spraywater into the engine air cleaner/filter intake and/or housing.

If cleaning the vehicle with the hoodopen, take care not to spray waterdirectly near the filter opening of the


10-22 Vehicle Care

air cleaner, as shown in theillustration, as this could damagethe vehicle's engine.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace them at the first oilchange after each 80 000 km(50,000 mi) interval. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3. If driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑7.

6.2L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, 6.2LV8 Engine LS9 and 7.0L V8 Engine

LS7 Similar

A. Tube

B. Clamp

C. Duct

2. Remove the tube (A) from the aircleaner assembly.

3. Loosen the clamp (B) at thethrottle body and remove theduct (C).


LS7 Similar

A. Mass Air Flow SensorConnector

B. Connector Lock

4. Remove the connector lock (B)located at the bottom of themass air flow sensorconnector (A).

5. Press on the top and bottom ofthe mass air flow sensorconnector (A) and remove.


Vehicle Care 10-23

6.2L V8 Engine LS3 6.2L V8 Engine LS9 Shown, 7.0LV8 Engine LS7 Similar

6. To access the air filter element,gently pull the air cleanerassembly upward until thefasteners are released from theretainer pins in the upperradiator support.

The LS3 engine has threeretainer pins and the LS7 andLS9 engines have two.


LS7 Similar

A. Screw

B. Filter Cover

C. Filter


10-24 Vehicle Care

7. To remove the filter from theLS3 and LS7 engines, removethe six screws (A) securing thefilter cover (B) then pull away togain access to the air filter (C).

To remove the filter assemblyfrom the LS9 engine, remove thesix screws securing the filtercover. The filter cover and the airfilter are one piece.

8. Inspect or replace the filter orfilter cover assembly. SeeMaintenance Replacement Partson page 11‑14.

9. Reverse Steps 2–7 to replacethe air cleaner/filter cover.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling System (Engine)The cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

7.0L Engine Shown, 6.2L EngineSimilar

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan

B. Coolant Surge Tank withPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.


Vehicle Care 10-25

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Cooling System(Intercooler)The 6.2L LS9 superchargedV8 engine has an intercoolercooling system. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for location of theintercooler.

The intercooler cooling system hasa special procedure for draining andadding coolant. Because thisprocedure is difficult, see the dealerfor service if the intercooler is lowon coolant. The procedure can alsobe found in the service manual. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑16.

Checking Coolant

1. Verify that the engine andintercooler are no longer hot.

2. Place a cloth to absorb possiblecoolant loss under the driver'sside bleeder valve (A).

3. Loosen, but do not completelyunscrew the bleeder valve tocheck for coolant in the system.

4. Tighten the bleeder valve if thereis coolant flowing out of thebleeder valve.


10-26 Vehicle Care

5. If there is no coolant flowing outof the bleeder valve, there couldbe a leak in the system. Tightenthe bleeder valve and contactthe dealer for service.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑29.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle's coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If improper coolantmixture, inhibitors, or additivesare used in the vehicle coolingsystem, the engine couldoverheat and be damaged. Toomuch water in the mixture canfreeze and crack engine coolingparts. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Use onlythe proper mixture of engine


Vehicle Care 10-27

coolant for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be sure

the cooling system is cool beforethis is done. See Cooling System(Engine) on page 10‑24 or CoolingSystem (Intercooler) on page 10‑25.

The engine coolant surge tank istoward the rear of the enginecompartment on the driver side ofthe vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑8.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at the FULL COLDmark on the coolant surge tank.

When the engine is hot, the levelcould be higher than the FULLCOLD line. If the coolant is belowthe FULL COLD line when theengine is hot, there could be a leakin the cooling system.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer forservice.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.


10-28 Vehicle Care

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture directlyto the surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.

1. When the cooling system,including the coolant surge tankpressure cap and upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot, removethe pressure cap.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter turn and then stop.

If a hiss is heard, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture until the level insidestabilizes at the FULL COLDmark on the front of thesurge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Any time during thisprocedure, watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level stabilizes at theFULL COLD mark on the coolantsurge tank.


Vehicle Care 10-29

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

Check the level in the surge tankwhen the system has cooleddown. If the coolant is not at theproper level, repeat Steps 1−4,then reinstall the pressure cap.If the coolant is not at the properlevel when the system coolsdown again, see the dealer.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on theinstrument panel cluster. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gaugeon page 5‑15. The vehicle may alsodisplay a COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE message on the

Driver Information Center (DIC). SeeEngine Cooling System Messageson page 5‑38.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood but to get service help rightaway. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Assistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑10.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine and have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Running the enginewithout coolant may causedamage or a fire. Vehicle damagewould not be covered by thewarranty. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑30 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned.Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

(Continued)


10-30 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued)

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑30 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day. Stops after high-speed driving. Idles for long periods in traffic

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. If in a traffic jam, shift toN (Neutral) while stopped. If it issafe to do so, pull off the road,shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral)and let the engine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until it

cools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”next in this section.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode letsthe vehicle be driven to a safeplace, up to 80 km (50 mi), in anemergency situation. If anoverheated engine condition existsand the messages COOLANTOVER TEMPERATURE andREDUCED ENGINE POWER aredisplayed, along with the checkengine light, an overheat protectionmode which alternates firing groupsof cylinders helps prevent enginedamage. In this mode, there is asignificant loss in power and engineperformance.

Driving extended distances in theoverheat protection mode should beavoided.


Vehicle Care 10-31

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair. Theengine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑13.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑8 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise is

heard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the ignition off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.There are markings on bothsides of the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULLCOLD mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

When the engine compartment ishot, the level should be at the HOTmark. When the enginecompartment is cool, the levelshould be at the FULL COLD mark.


10-32 Vehicle Care

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer instructions beforeuse. If the vehicle will be operatingin an area where the temperaturemay fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

Brakes

Brake Wear (Except Z06, ZR1,manual transmission GrandSport Coupe, and 427Convertible)

This vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.


Vehicle Care 10-33

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Wear (Z06, ZR1, manualtransmission Grand SportCoupe, and 427 Convertible)

This vehicle does not have built-inbrake pad wear indicators andperiodic visual inspection of thebrake pads is required to determinewhen to replace the brake pads.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.. Make sure that the brakes have

been given sufficient time to cooland then set the park brake.

Rear

Front


10-34 Vehicle Care

. Brake pads can be visuallyinspected through the wheel byinspecting the outer brake padsat each wheel.

. Brake pads should be replacedwhen worn to 2 mm of padthickness. New pads are 10 mmthick.

. In addition, brake pad inspectionis required any time the tires areremoved.

The Z06, ZR1, manual transmissionGrand Sport Coupe, and 427Convertible models also have an

electronic brake pad wear sensorsystem. When pads are worn, theCHANGE BRAKE PADS messagedisplays in the Driver InformationCenter. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑35.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Rotor Wear

ZR1 and Z06 models may have,ceramic brake rotors. Rotors shouldbe visually inspected whenever thebrake pads are replaced. Rotorsalso need to be weighed beforebrake pads are replaced to confirmthat the rotor mass is greater thanthe wear-out mass printed on therotor. The rotor can be reused if theweight of the rotor is above themass limit. Rotor inspection andweighing methods can be found in

the service manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑16.

Brake Rotor Protector

{ WARNING

Ceramic rotors will be very hotafter operation and touching themmay cause burns. Be sure brakesystem is completely cool prior toinstallation of protector, or comingin contact with them.

Notice: Rotors may be chipped ifhard contact is made with thewheel during wheel installation orremoval. Always use the rotorprotectors. Be sure to carefullyfollow wheel removal andinstallation instructions.


Vehicle Care 10-35

A rotor protector should always beinstalled before any wheel removal.The protector can be installed by

feeding it through the wheel spokesand slipping it over the outer edgeof the rotor. Leave the protector inplace, over the rotor edge, until thewheel is re-installed. Rotorprotectors are available throughyour dealer.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every brake stop, the disc brakesautomatically adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced — for example,when the brake linings wear downand new ones are installed — besure to get new approvedreplacement parts. If this is notdone, the brakes might not workproperly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrongfor the vehicle, the balance betweenthe front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.


10-36 Vehicle Care

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑8.

The fluid level should be above theMIN mark on the reservoir. If it isnot, have the brake hydraulicsystem checked to see if there isa leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is between the MIN and MAXmarks.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.


Vehicle Care 10-37

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

For battery replacement, see yourdealer or the service manual. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑16.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑75 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Some vehicles have a batterymaintainer package. Follow theinstructions provided with thebattery maintainer package to keepthe battery charged when thevehicle is not in use. For vehicleswithout a battery maintainer, see thefollowing information.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

See “Power Window Initialization” inPower Windows on page 2‑17.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug hole.

What to Use

To add lubricant when the level islow or to completely refill afterdraining, see Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12. Thenfill to the bottom of the fill plug holewith the required lubricant.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-39

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑33.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑33.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For properwindshield wiper blade length andtype, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑14.

Notice: Allowing the wiper arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the wiper assembly awayfrom the windshield.

2. Lift up on the plastic latch in themiddle of the wiper blade wherethe wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.


Vehicle Care 10-41

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow the wiperblade to touch the windshield.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Windshield ReplacementThe windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the vehicle has to havethe windshield replaced, get onethat is designed for HUD or theHUD image may look out of focus.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑44.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


10-42 Vehicle Care

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ WARNING

The high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a veryhigh voltage. If you try to serviceany of the system components,you could be seriously injured.Have your dealer or a qualifiedtechnician service them.

The vehicle may have HIDheadlamps. After an HID headlampbulb has been replaced, you maynotice that the beam is a slightlydifferent shade than it was originally.This is normal.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps

A. High-beam Headlamp

B. Low-beam Headlamp

C. Front Parking/Turn Signal

If the low-beam headlamp needs tobe replaced, see your dealer. SeeHigh Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting on page 10‑42 for moreinformation.

To replace a high-beam or frontparking/turn signal bulb:

1. Turn the wheel to allow accessto the wheel well.

2. Remove the three outerfasteners to move the accesspanel back.

3. Remove the outer cover toexpose the high-beam headlampbulb socket.


Vehicle Care 10-43

4. Remove the headlamp bulb byreleasing the outer tabs from thesocket.

5. Remove the front parking/turnsignal bulb by turning the bulbsocket counterclockwise.

6. Replace the high-beamheadlamp bulb with a new bulband reattach to the bulb socket.

Replace the front parking/turnsignal bulb by turning the bulbsocket clockwise.

7. Reverse the Steps 2 through 4 toreinstall.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,and StoplampsTo replace a stoplamp, taillamp/turnsignal bulb:

1. Remove the screw from the topof the lamp assembly.

2. Tilt the lamp assemblytoward you.

3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarterturn counterclockwise and pullit out.

4. Pull the bulb straight out toremove it from the socket.

5. Push the new bulb in the bulbsocket until it snaps into place.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly byfirst lining up the tabs on thebottom of the lamp assemblywith the tabs in the vehicle, thenslide it in.

7. Replace the screw at the top ofthe lamp assembly.

Back-Up Lamps

{ WARNING

Exhaust system parts can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

1. Reach under the rear fascia andlocate the back-up lampassembly.

2. Remove the bulb socket byturning counterclockwise andpulling straight out of the lampassembly.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.


10-44 Vehicle Care

4. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket by turningclockwise.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws (A) fromthe license plate lampassembly (B).

2. Pull the lamp assembly downand turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and out of thelamp assembly.

3. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstallthe license plate lamp assembly.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 3157K

Front Parking/TurnSignal

5702KA

Headlamp,High-Beam Lamp

H9

LicensePlate Lamp

194

Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp

3057K

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.


Vehicle Care 10-45

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of J-Case fuses,mini-fuses and circuit breakers. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of firescaused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on theroad and do not have a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick somefeature of the vehicle that you canget along without — like the radio orcigarette lighter — and use its fuse,if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

Vehicles with the ZR1 package havean intercooler relay located on thefan shroud. See your dealer.

Vehicles with the ZR1 package alsohave a fuel system mini-fuse. It islocated near the battery in thebattery storage compartment in therear of the vehicle.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThere is one fuse block in theengine compartment located on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for more information onlocation.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


10-46 Vehicle Care

For ZR1 models, the Fuel Systemfuse is located at the battery.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuse Usage

1 TransmissionControl Module/Transmission

2 Horn, AlternatorSense

Fuse Usage

3 Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)/RealTime Damping

4 Wiper

5 Stoplamps/Back-Up Lamps

6 Oxygen Sensor

7 Battery Main 5

8 Parking Lamps

9 Powertrain RelayInput/ElectronicThrottle Control

10 ManualTransmissionSolenoids

11 Antilock BrakeSystem

12 Odd NumberedFuel Injectors

13 ElectronicSuspensionControl (Option)


Vehicle Care 10-47

Fuse Usage

14 Canister PurgeSolenoid, Mass AirFlow Sensor

15 Air ConditionerCompressor

16 Even NumberedFuel Injectors

17 Windshield Washer

18 Headlamp Washer

19 Passenger SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

20 Fuel Pump(except ZR1)

21 Driver SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

22 Front Fog Lamp

23 Passenger SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

Fuse Usage

24 Driver SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

56 Engine ControlModule (ECM)/TransmissionControlModule (TCM)/Easy Key Module

J-StyleFuses

Usage

25 Cooling Fan

26 Battery Main 3

27 Antilock BrakeSystem

28 Heating/Ventilation/Air ConditioningBlower

29 Battery Main 2

30 Starter

31 Audio Amplifier

J-StyleFuses

Usage

32 Intercooler Pump

33 Battery Main 1

Micro-Relays Usage

34 Horn

35 AirConditioningCompressor

36 WindshieldWasher

37 ParkingLamps, FogLamps

38 FrontFog Lamp

39 High-BeamHeadlamp

46 HeadlampWasher

55 Fuel Pump(except ZR1)


10-48 Vehicle Care

Mini-Relays Usage

40 Rear Defog

41 Windshield WiperHigh/Low

42 Windshield WiperRun/Accessory

43 Crank

44 PowertrainIgnition 1

45 Windshield WiperOn/Off

47 Low-BeamHeadlamp

Spare Fuses Usage

48 Spare

49 Spare

50 Spare

51 Spare

52 Spare

53 Spare

54 Fuse Puller

Diodes Usage

§ Diode 1

§ Wiper

§ Diode 2

Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block islocated on the passenger side of thevehicle, under the instrument paneland under the toe-board.

Remove the carpet and toe-boardcovering to access the fuse block bypulling at the top of each corner ofthe panel. Open the fuse blockcover to access the fuses.

You can remove fuses using thefuse puller.


Vehicle Care 10-49

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

BCK/UP LAMP

Back-up Lamps

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

BTSI SOL/STRWHL LCK

BrakeTransmission ShiftInterlock, SteeringWheelColumn Lock

CLSTR/HUD Cluster, Head-UpDisplay

CRUISESWTCH

Cruise ControlSwitch

CTSY/LAMP Courtesy Lamp

DR LCK Door Locks

DRIV DRSWITCH

Driver Door Switch

ECM Engine ControlModule (ECM)


10-50 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

EXH MDL ExhaustModule (Z06 &ZR1),Spare (Coupe andConvertible)

FUSE PLR Fuse Puller

GM LANRUN/CRNK

GM LAN Devices

HTD SEAT/WPR RLY

Heated Seat,Wiper Relays

HVAC/PWR SND

Heating Ventilation/Air Conditioning,Power Sounder

IGN SWTCH/INTR SNSR

Ignition Switch,Intrusion Sensor

Fuses Usage

ISRVM/HVAC Electric InsideRearview Mirror,Heating,Ventilation, AirConditioning

ONSTAR OnStar (ifequipped)

RDO/S-BAND

Radio, S-Band

REAR FOG/ALDL/TOPSWTCH

Rear Fog Lamp,Assembly LineDiagnostic LinkConnector,Convertible TopSwitch

REVERSELAMPS

Reverse Lamps

RUN CRNK Run/Crank Relay

Fuses Usage

SDM/AOSSWTCHAIRBAG

Sensing andDiagnostic Module,AutomaticOccupant SensingModule, Airbag

SPARE Spare

SPARE Spare

SPARE Spare

SPARE Spare

STOP LAMP Stop Lamp

SWC DM Steering WheelDimming

TELESWTCH/MSM

Telescope Switch,Memory SeatModule

TONNEAURELSE

Tonneau Release

TPA Tonneau PulldownActuator


Vehicle Care 10-51

Fuses Usage

BLANK Blank

BLANK Blank

FUEL DRRELSE

Fuel Door Release

REAR/FOG Rear Fog Lamps

TONNEAURELSE

Tonneau Release

TRUNKRELSE

Trunk Release

Fuses Usage

AUX PWR Auxiliary Power

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

Fuses Usage

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

DRVRHTD SEAT

Driver Heated Seat

LTR Cigarette Lighter

PASSHTD SEAT

PassengerHeated Seat

Fuses Usage

PWRSEATS MSM

Power Seats,Memory SeatModule

PWR/WNDWS/TRUNK/FUELRELSE CB

Power Windows,Trunk, Fuel DoorRelease CircuitBreaker

TRUNKRELSE

Trunk Release

WPR DWELL Wiper Dwell

WPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/Washer


10-52 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.


Vehicle Care 10-53

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation onpage 10‑62 for inflation pressureadjustment for high-speeddriving.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not, originally,equipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on snow or ice-coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10‑68.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Run-Flat TiresThis vehicle, when new, had run-flattires. There is no spare tire, no tirechanging equipment, and no placeto store a tire in the vehicle.

The vehicle also has a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)that indicates a loss of tire pressurein any of the tires.

{ WARNING

If the low tire warning lightdisplays on the instrument cluster,the handling capabilities will bereduced during severemaneuvers. Driving too fast couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured. Do notdrive over 90 km/h (55 mph) whenthe low tire warning light isdisplayed. Drive cautiously andcheck the tire pressures as soonas possible.

Run-flat tires can be driven on withno air pressure. There is no need tostop on the side of the road tochange the tire. Continue driving;however, do not drive too far or toofast. Driving on the tire may not bepossible if there is permanentdamage. To prevent permanentdamage, the tire can be driven withno air pressure for up to 105 km(65 mi) at speeds slower than90 km/h (55 mph). As soon as


10-54 Vehicle Care

possible, contact the nearestauthorized GM or run-flat servicingfacility for inspection and repair orreplacement.

When driving on a deflated run-flattire, avoid potholes and other roadhazards that could damage the tireand/or wheel beyond repair. When atire has been damaged, or if drivenany distance while deflated, checkwith an authorized run-flat tireservice center to determine whetherthe tire can be repaired or should bereplaced. To maintain the run-flatfeature, all replacement tires mustbe run-flat tires.

To locate the nearest GM or run-flatservicing facility, call CustomerAssistance.

The valve stems on run-flat tireshave sensors that are part of theTPMS. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑62. Thesesensors contain batteries that aredesigned to last for 10 years under

normal driving conditions. See yourdealer for wheel or sensorreplacement.

Notice: Using liquid sealants candamage the tire valves and tirepressure monitor sensors in therun-flat tires. This damage is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not use liquid sealants inrun-flat tires.

Low-Profile Tires

Low‐Profile Performance Tire

The original equipment tires onthis vehicle are classified aslow‐profile performance tires.These tires are designed forvery responsive driving on wetor dry pavement, however, mayproduce more road noise andtend to wear faster.

Notice: Low‐profile tires aremore susceptible to damagefrom road hazards or curbimpact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheelassembly damage can occurwhen coming into contactwith road hazards like,potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into acurb. The warranty does notcover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, whenpossible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Sport Cup TiresThis vehicle may come withMichelin Pilot Sport Cup competitionoriented tires that are DOT approvedfor street use. These tires areincluded on the Z06 model with theZ07 Performance Package and onthe ZR1 model with the PDE HighPerformance Package. Sport Cuptires use a special tread andcompound that provide more gripthan normal road tires. Theminimum tread depth will bereached earlier than typical tires,resulting in reduced tire life. Thisspecial tread and compound willdecrease performance in coldclimates, heavy rain, and standingwater.

{ WARNING

Driving on wet roads, in heavyrain, or through standing waterwith Sport Cup tires may causehydroplaning and loss of control.Use extreme caution and driveslowly on wet roads.

{ WARNING

Driving with Sport Cup tires onsnow, ice, or cold road surfacescan cause loss of control or anaccident. Sport Cup tires are asummer season tires and are notintended to be driven on snow,ice, or road surfaces below 10° C(50° F). Do not drive a vehiclewith Sport Cup tires in theseconditions.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will decreaseperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving in coldtemperatures or on snow or icecovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires on page 10‑53.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger tire sidewall.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑70.


Vehicle Care 10-57

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).


10-58 Vehicle Care

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑60.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can also

identify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard.

See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑60 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.


10-60 Vehicle Care

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑67.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑70.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.


Vehicle Care 10-61

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check the tirepressure. Proper tire inflationcannot be determined by lookingat the tire. Check the tireinflation pressure when the tiresare cold, meaning the vehiclehas not been driven for at leastthree hours or no more than1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget the pressure measurement.

If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.

If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure in high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks.


10-62 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

The tires require inflation pressureadjustment when driving the vehicleat speeds of 282 km/h (175 mph) orhigher, where it is legal. Set the coldinflation pressure to the maximuminflation pressure shown on the tiresidewall, or 265 kPa (38 psi),whichever is lower. See theexample following. Return the tiresto the recommended cold tireinflation pressure when high-speeddriving has ended. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Example:

The maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tiresidewall, in small letters, near therim flange. It will read something likethis: Maximum load690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)Max. Press.

For this example, set the inflationpressure for high‐speed driving at265 kPa (38 psi).

Racing or other competitive drivingmay affect the warranty coverage ofthe vehicle. See the warrantybooklet for more information.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)


Vehicle Care 10-63

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑64.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly on your vehicle. TheTPMS sensors monitor the airpressure in the tires and transmitsthe tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning light,located in the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressure

shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message appear ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25 and TireMessages on page 5‑48.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑60 foradditional information.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑65, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑66, When It Is Time forNew Tires on page 10‑67, and Tireson page 10‑52.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only the


Vehicle Care 10-65

GM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. The TPMS sensor matching

process was not done or notcompleted successfully. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑68.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after replacingone or more of the TPMS sensors.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationIf the vehicle has non-directionaltires, they should be rotatedevery 12 000 km/7,500 mi. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieveuniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10‑67and Wheel Replacement onpage 10‑72.

Directional tires should not berotated. Each tire and wheelshould be used only in the

position it is in. Directional tireswill have an arrow on the tireindicating the proper direction ofrotation or will have “left” or“right” molded on the sidewall.

Different tire sizes should not berotated front to rear.

Use this rotation pattern if thevehicle has different size tireson the front and rear and theyare non-directional.


Vehicle Care 10-67

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑60and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑64.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could come

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

off and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑65 and TireRotation on page 10‑66.


10-68 Vehicle Care

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacturer date is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01–52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight to

slow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑55, foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.


Vehicle Care 10-69

If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10‑66 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, and ZR speed rated tires.Never exceed the winter tire'smaximum speed capability whenusing winter tires with a lowerspeed rating.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes(other than those originallyinstalled on the vehicle), brands,or types may cause loss ofcontrol of the vehicle, resulting ina crash or other vehicle damage.Use the correct size, brand, andtype of tire on all four wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑64.


10-70 Vehicle Care

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12, for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑68 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with


Vehicle Care 10-71

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of


10-72 Vehicle Care

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smooth

road, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts,or wheel nuts with new GM originalequipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireclearance to the body andchassis.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it isfastened, can make wheelnuts become loose after atime. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, acloth or a paper towel can beused, however, use a scraperor wire brush to remove allrust or dirt.

Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on studsor the threads of the wheel nuts.The wheel nuts might come looseand the wheel could fall off,causing a crash.

{ WARNING

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can causethe wheel to become loose andeven come off. This could lead toa crash. Be sure to use thecorrect wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get newGM original equipmentwheel nuts.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification.

Tighten the wheel lug nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash. Use anothertype of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it forthe vehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, driveslowly and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. See Tires onpage 10‑52 for additionalinformation. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

The vehicle has no spare tire, notire changing equipment, and noplace to store a tire.

If the vehicle has run-flat tires, thereis no need to stop on the side of theroad to change a flat tire. SeeRun-Flat Tires on page 10‑53.

{ WARNING

Special tools and procedures arerequired to service a run-flat tire.If these special tools andprocedures are not used, injury orvehicle damage may occur.Always be sure the proper toolsand procedures, as described inthe service manual, are used.

To order a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑16.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑37.

If your battery has run down, youmay want to use another vehicleand some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use thefollowing steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: If you try to start yourvehicle by pushing or pulling it,you could damage your vehicle.Do not push or pull your vehicleto start it; instead, use the jumpstarting procedure in this manualto start your vehicle when thebattery has run down.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parkingbrakes.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on eachvehicle.

6.2L LS3 Shown, 7.0L LS7 and6.2L LS9 Similar

Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) terminal (A) and aremote negative (−) terminal (B),as shown in the illustration,which should be used to jumpstart your vehicle.

The remote positive (+)terminal (A) can be accessed byopening the cover of the enginecompartment fuse block.

The remote negative (−)terminal (B) is locatedunderneath the engine cover,below the engine oil fill cap.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑8 for thelocation of the enginecompartment fuse block andengine oil fill cap.

You will not need to access thebattery for jump starting. Theremote terminals are for thatpurpose.


Vehicle Care 10-77

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.


10-78 Vehicle Care

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least 45 cm(18 inches) away from the deadbattery, but not near engineparts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks gettingback to the battery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal for thispurpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

You may need to initialize the powerwindows. See “Power WindowInitialize” under Power Windows onpage 2‑17.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑10.

Recreational VehicleTowingNotice: Dolly towing or dinghytowing the vehicle may causedamage because of reducedground clearance. Always put thevehicle on a flatbed truck ortrailer.

The vehicle was neither designednor intended to be towed with any ofits wheels on the ground. If thevehicle must be towed, see Towingthe Vehicle on page 10‑79.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not usepetroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents asthey can damage the vehicle'spaint, metal, or plastic parts.If damage occurs, it would not becovered by the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Notice: Avoid usinghigh-pressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can

damage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Convertible Top Care

Frequently hand wash convertibletops with mild car wash soap. Neveruse a stiff brush, steam, bleach,or aggressive cleaners.If necessary, a soft brush can beused to remove dirt. When finishedcleaning, thoroughly rinse the fabric.Avoid automatic car washes withoverhead brushes or veryhigh-pressure sprays as they cancause damage and leaking.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Only lower the top when it iscompletely dry and avoid leavingthe top lowered for extendedperiods of time to prevent excessiveinterior weathering.

Avoid leaving large amounts ofsnow on the top for extendedperiods of time as damage may alsooccur.

Carbon Fiber Panels

Carbon fiber panels can be washedand waxed like any other panels.

Use a clear or black pigmented waxon the inner hood carbon fiberpanel.

ZR1 Hood Window

The hood window on the ZR1 canbe cleaned in the same manner asthe headlamp lenses. See "CleaningExterior Lamps/Lenses andEmblems" for more information.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses andemblems. Follow instructions under"Washing the Vehicle" in thissection.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstripsonce a year. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an

automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, andsteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Fiberglass Springs (CompositeSprings)

Notice: Do not use acidic orcorrosive cleaning products,engine degreasers, or aluminumcleaning agents on fiberglasssprings as it may cause damage.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty. Useonly approved cleaners.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.


Vehicle Care 10-83

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to home

furnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructions

on the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.78 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.


10-84 Vehicle Care

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Notice: Cleaning the windshieldwith water during the first three tosix months of ownership willreduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.


Vehicle Care 10-85

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,

using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

Notice: Do not attach a devicewith a suction cup to the display.This may cause damage andwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, and Other PlasticSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters, or spot removers. Do

not use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterefere with the accelerator or

brake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by two hook-type retainersand the passenger side is held inplace by one.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Installing and Replacing theFloor Mats

1. Pull up on the rear of the floormat to remove it from the hookretainers.

2. Reinstall by lining up theopenings in the floor mat overthe hook retainers and pushdown into position.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


10-88 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They have up‐to‐date tools and equipment for fastand accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trained

technicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Required Services are theresponsibility of the vehicle owner.It is recommended to have yourdealer perform these services every12 000 km/7,500 mi. Proper vehiclemaintenance helps to keep thevehicle in good working condition,improves fuel economy, andreduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services ‐Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑45.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services ‐Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑6.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑13.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑60.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑65.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑32.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle service

for more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑19.

Required Services Every12 000 km/7,500 mi. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑13 and EngineOil Life System on page 10‑19.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑26.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑32.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑79. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑40.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑60.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑65.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑21.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑79.



. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑13.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑79.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑38.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑39.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑39.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System(Engine) on page 10‑24 or CoolingSystem (Intercooler) on page 10‑25.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(6) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

(7) Or every two years, whichevercomes first.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System(Engine) on page 10‑24 or CoolingSystem (Intercooler) on page 10‑25.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(6) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

(7) Or every two years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.



Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.



Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑83 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑79.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑13.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑26.

ZR1 Only: Intercooler System 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑26.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Hydraulic Clutch System Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only GM Part No. 19299570, inCanada 19299571, Super DOT-4 brake fluid.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Chassis Lubrication (Z06, ZR1,manual transmission Grand SportCoupe, and 427 Convertible Rear

Toe-Link Outer Ends)

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88861800, in Canada 88861801).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Rear Axle (Limited-Slip Differential) DEXRON® LS Gear Oil. See Rear Axle on page 10‑38.

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

6.2L LS3 V8 and 7.0L LS7 V8 Engines 15776148 A3077C

6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 25940997 A3107C

Engine Oil Filter

6.2L LS3 V8 Engine 89017524 PF48

6.2L LS3 V8 Engine with Z52 Dry Sump Oil System 12626224 UPF-48R

6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 12626224 UPF-48R

7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 12626224 UPF-48R

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 15848592 CF139

Spark Plug

6.2L LS3 V8 Engine 12621258 41-110

6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 12571165 41-104

7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 12571165 41-104

Wiper Blades — 52.5 cm (20.7 in)

Driver Side 12335960 —

Passenger Side 12335961 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-5

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions.

See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

6.2L LS3 V8 Engine 11.3 L 11.9 qt

6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – Cooling System 12.0 L 12.7 qt

6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – SuperchargerIntercooler Cooling System

4.9 L 5.2 qt

7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 11.3 L 11.9 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

6.2L LS3 V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt

6.2L LS3 V8 with Z52 Dry Sump Oil System 9.9 L 10.5 qt


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 9.9 L 10.5 qt

7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 9.9 L 10.5 qt

Fuel Tank 68.0 L 18.0 gal

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and FilterReplacement)

6.2 L 6.5 qt

Manual Transmission – Base 3.5 L 3.6 qt

Manual Transmission – Z16 4.0 L 4.2 qt

Manual Transmission – Z06 4.3 L 4.5 qt

Manual Transmission – ZR1 4.3 L 4.5 qt

Manual Transmission – 427 Convertible 4.3 L 4.5 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap Firing Order

6.2L LS3 V8 W AutomaticManual

1.016 mm (0.040 in) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3

6.2L LS9 V8 T Manual 1.016 mm (0.040 in) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3

7.0L LS7 V8 E Manual 1.016 mm (0.040 in) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3

Engine Data

Engine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio

6.2L LS3 V8 withoutoption NPP

430@ 5900 rpm 424 lb ft @ 4600 rpm 6.2L 10.69:1

6.2L LS3 V8 withoption NPP

436@ 5900 rpm 428 lb ft @ 4600 rpm 6.2L 10.69:1

6.2L LS9 V8Supercharged

638@ 6500 rpm 604 lb ft @ 3800 rpm 6.2L 9.10:1

7.0L LS7 V8 505@ 6300 rpm 470 lb ft @ 4800 rpm 7.0L 11.00:1


Technical Data 12-5

Engine Drive Belt Routing

6.2L LS3 V8, 7.0L LS7 V8 Engines

6.2L LS9 V8 Engine


12-6 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . 13-18OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-19Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20


13-2 Customer Information

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within



40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).



Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.

Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.However, we recognize that despite

the good intentions of all partiesinvolved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to your dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or yourdealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5.



Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Chevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from09:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

01-800-466-0811

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8190

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com

The Chevrolet online ownerexperience is a one-stop resourcethat allows interaction withChevrolet and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12‑1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.chevrolet.com to registeryour vehicle.

Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.



. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment

required for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)As a new owner, your vehicle isautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program. Theservices are available at no costunder the terms and conditions ofthe program. The RoadsideAssistance program is not part of,or included, in the coverageprovided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Roadside Assistance providesassistance to the driver andpassengers while driving the vehiclewithin your city of residence or onany passable road in Mexico, theUnited States, and Canada.Services are subject to thelimitations described in the followingpages. Program coverage varies bycountry.

Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

This program expires two yearsfrom the date of the invoice for thevehicle, regardless of vehiclemileage and changes in vehicleownership.

For more information about therenewal of this program at the endof its term, contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center at01-800-466-0800.



Services Provided. Flat Tire Change: If unable to

change a flat tire, RoadsideAssistance will provide towingservice to the nearest authorizedChevrolet dealership. It is theowner's responsibility for therepair or replacement of the tire.This service is limited to thetransfer of the vehicle to therepair facility.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery:Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. *Emergency Messages:Transmission of urgent phonemessages.

. *Emergency Calls: Call foremergency services.

. *Dealership LocationAssistance: Informationregarding addresses andtelephone numbers for Chevroletdealers.

. Emergency Towing: Tow to thenearest dealer for warrantyservice if the vehicle cannot bedriven.

If the vehicle is involved in anaccident during the commissionof a crime, administrativeviolation, or breach of trafficregulations, RoadsideAssistance will not provideservice. When the vehicle is notaccessible to be towed, allmaneuvers required to access itwill be at the owner's expense.

If the vehicle is in another cityoutside of your residence,Roadside Assistance is limitedto moving the vehicle to thenearest dealer. If you would likethe vehicle moved to a differentdealer, you will be asked tocover the difference in cost atthe time of the move.

If the vehicle cannot be receivedby the nearest Chevrolet dealerdue to scheduling conflicts, thevehicle will be taken to a safeplace where it will remain for upto 48 hours until it can be takento the dealer. If the storage costsexceed the amount authorized,the owner is responsible to paythe difference at the time ofservice. Contact RoadsideAssistance for more informationon authorized amounts.

. *Trip Interruption: This serviceis provided if you are preventedfrom further usage of yourvehicle while traveling and it isnot possible for the nearestChevrolet dealership to repairthe vehicle the same day,requiring the vehicle to stay atthe dealership for a night ormore. If this happens, in additionto the previously listed servicesand prior to confirmation by thedealership, you are entitled tochoose one of the followingalternatives, within the limits of



existing Roadside Assistanceprogram guidelines. If the costsexceed the amount authorizedfor these services, you must paythe difference at the time ofservice.

Roadside Assistance willcoordinate hotelaccommodations for all vehicletravelers for up to two nights.

A rental car will be provided forup to two days and the vehiclemust be returned to its originaldestination, excluding vehicleswith a carrying capacity greaterthan 3.5 tons.

Complimentary Transportation: Ifyou prefer to continue your tripto the intended destination orreturn to your place ofresidence, and the trip requiresmore than eight hours driving onthe road, transportation for thedriver and passengers by firstclass bus or coach commercialairline will be provided to alocation chosen by Roadside

Assistance, depending onavailability at the chosendestination. Restrictions applybased on vehicle specifications.

If you are on the road, taxiservice to the nearest busstation or airport will beprovided.

. *ComplimentaryTransportation for Vehicle PickUp: Transportation to pick upyour vehicle after repairs arecomplete. Once the dealer hasreported that the vehicle hasbeen repaired, RoadsideAssistance will provide bus orcommercial airline one-wayservice (subject to availability)for the person designated by youto collect your vehicle at thedealership's location if you or thedesignated person are not in thesame town or city as thedealership.

*These services are not provided forU.S. or Canada residents. Allservices provided in the U.S. and

Canada are at the owner's expenseand will be reimbursed by RoadsideAssistance.

Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance

Roadside Assistance does notcover or reimburse services for thefollowing:. Events caused by fraud or bad

faith by the driver.. Vehicle immobilization situations

due to a major force orunforeseen circumstances, suchas natural phenomena of anextraordinary nature,earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,and other cyclonic storms.

. Vehicle immobilization situationsarising from car accidentscaused by the driver of thevehicle or third parties. Thismeans any occurrence thatcauses physical injury to theoccupants and/or the vehiclecaused by external forces.



. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,armed forces or police actionswhich prevent timely delivery ofassistance services.

. Food service, beverages,telephone calls, or other extracosts. Accommodation costsapply only to Mexico per theterms and conditions of theRoadside Assistance program.

. Any damage to the vehiclewithout intent, derived from theservices provided.

. Cost of towing a trailer whenchoosing a Chevrolet dealer thatis nearest to the temporarystorage facility for the disabledvehicle.

. Cost of all maneuvers requiredto access the vehicle when it isnot available to be towed.

. Cost of fuel provided.

Routine vehicle repair costs are notcovered by the RoadsideAssistance program. For moreinformation, see your new vehiclewarranty.

Contacting Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance services are ofno cost to you and available24 hours a day, 365 days a year.Costs are only incurred in situationsthat exceed the limits of theprogram, some of which are listedpreviously in this section.

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0800

United States

1-866-466-8901

Canada

1-800-268-6800

E-mail

[email protected]

Chevrolet reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.



Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.



Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to your

destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collision

repairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safety

performance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be



able to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑10.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑19.



Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacy

Vehicle Data RecordingThis vehicle may be equipped with amodule that records data in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as when an air bag deploys orthe vehicle hits a road obstacle.This data could help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. Some data may berelated to the vehicle dynamics andsafety systems operation. The datamay show:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.



. If and how far the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data could provide anunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.Data could be recorded by thevehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded under normal drivingconditions and no personal data arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine recorded data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read recorded data, specialequipment is required, and accessto the vehicle or the module isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the module.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation; aboutcollisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPS

speed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the navigation manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.



Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Press the OnStar Emergency button> to get a priority connection to anEmergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Press> to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations before firstresponders arrive.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped. OnStarcan unlock the vehicle doorsremotely, if it is equipped with

automatic door locks, and can helppolice locate the vehicle if it isstolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.The OnStar mapping database iscontinuously updated. For coveragemaps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with addressand the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations fromMapQuest.com to their Turn-by-TurnNavigation or screen-basednavigation system. When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, press the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps seewww.onstar.com (U.S.),www.onstar.ca (Canada).


14-4 OnStar

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.),www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Hands-Free Calling

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. The system responds“OnStar Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” The system responds“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing. Thesystem responds “911.”

4. Say “Call.” The system responds“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.


OnStar 14-5

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple, Androidand BlackBerry devices to checkvehicle fuel level, oil life, or tirepressure; to start the vehicle (ifequipped) or unlock it; or to connectto an OnStar Advisor. For OnStarRemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.), www.onstar.ca (Canada).

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, press Q, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. In the U.S. see www.onstar.com

(U.S.) or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR.(1-888-466-7827).

. In Canada see www.onstar.ca(Canada) or call1-888-4.ONSTAR.(1-888-466-7827).

. TTY 1–877–248–2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.


14-6 OnStar

.OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may prevent

service such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca(Canada)

The website provides access toaccount information, allowsmanagement of the OnStarsubscription, and viewing of videosof each service. Get subscriptionplan pricing and sign up for OnStarVehicle Diagnostics. Click on the“My Account” tab on the homepage. The website navigation andservices provided may vary bycountry.


OnStar 14-7

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in French or Spanish.PressQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.


14-8 OnStar

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑50. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada).Privacy-sensitive users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Active Handling System . . . . . . . 9-35Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-21Air Dam, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Airbag System (cont'd)What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-16AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-17Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-10

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

Audio SystemDiversity Antenna System . . . .7-12Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-40Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-44Taillamps, Turn Signal,and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-33

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9


INDEX i-3

Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 9-36Competitive Driving, Racingor Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Cooling System . . . . . . . .10-24, 10-25Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-16

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2, 13-4

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-5Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

DrivingCompetitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-22Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-9If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-12Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


i-4 INDEX

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-8Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Cooling System . . . . . . 10-24, 10-25Cooling System Messages . . .5-38Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Engine (cont'd)Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-14Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-24Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-20Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Front Air Dam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Front SeatsHeated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-46Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45Requirements, California . . . . .9-46System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40


INDEX i-5

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-60Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-60

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

GaugesBoost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Engine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-14Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-25Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-62Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-9Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii


i-6 INDEX

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-40Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-55LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18

Lamps (cont'd)Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Lifting the Vehicle, Tires . . . . . . . 10-3Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7LightingEntry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

LightsActive Handling System . . . . . .5-23Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Lights (cont'd)High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2One-to-Four Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-40LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3


INDEX i-7

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4MessagesBattery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-38Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-42Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

Messages (cont'd)Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-47Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-19Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-26One-to-Four Shift Light . . . . . . . . 5-21Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4


i-8 INDEX

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-16

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

PPanel, Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-39

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-23Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-20

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-12

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRacing or Other CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordingVehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15


INDEX i-9

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-26Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-13

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Ride Control SystemsActive Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-40Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-10

Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-5Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-13Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-12

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-12Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-3Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-2Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Securing Child Restraints . . . . . . 3-37SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-40


i-10 INDEX

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-6Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-12Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Sport Cup Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-38Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Starting the VehicleMesssages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12TaillampsTurn Signal andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-64Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Lifting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-62Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Run-Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55


INDEX i-11

Tires (cont'd)Sport Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-72When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53TowingGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . .9-50Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-79Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

TractionActive Handling System . . . . . .9-35Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-34Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-40Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .9-40

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50One-to-Four Shift Light . . . . . . .5-21

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-60Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-65Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-60

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-51Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 13-18Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16


i-12 INDEX

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-40

Documents

2013 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M · 2013 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M In Brief ... Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual - 2013 - crc2 - 11/8/12 Black plate (2,1) 2013 Chevrolet